Ross Builders Northwest - PROJECT MANUAL · 2019-05-18 · Tualatin, Oregon 97062 T: (503) 843-8233...

PROJECT MANUAL

for

Wilco - Conversion

17711 Jean Way

Lake Oswego, Oregon

Client:

Wilco

200 Industrial Way

Mt. Angel, Oregon 97362

Architect:

Novak Architecture, Inc

17020 SW Upper Boones Ferry Road, Ste 200

Portland, Oregon 97224

Project Number: 18-17

May 10, 2019

00002 - 1

PROJECT MANUAL FOR:

WILCO FARM STORES

CONVERSION 17711 Jean Way Lake Oswego, Oregon

OWNER:

WILCO 200 Industrial Way Mt Angel, Oregon 97362 T: (541) 845-6122

ARCHITECT:

NOVAK ARCHITECTURE, INC 6975 SW Sandburg Street, Suite 320 Portland, Oregon 97223 T: (503) 352-4987

CIVIL ENGINEER / LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT:

David Evans and Associates 2100 SW River Parkway Portland, Oregon 97201 T: (503) 223-6663

STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:

David Evans and Associates 2100 SW River Parkway Portland, Oregon 97201 T: (503) 223-6663

MECHANICAL ENGINEER:

MEP Consulting LLC 9220 SW Barbur Blvd,#119-324 Portland, Oregon 97219 T: (503) 718-7699

PLUMBING DESIGNER:

Commercial Plumbing Consulting & Design, LLC 18859 SW Martinazzi Ave Tualatin, Oregon 97062 T: (503) 843-8233

00005 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Wilco Farm Store Lake Oswego, Oregon

INTRODUCTORY PAGES

00001 COVER 00002 CONSULTANTS 00005 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 INDEX OF DRAWINGS

DIVISION 0 BIDDING AND CONTRACT

00010 INDEX OF DRAWINGS 00500 AGREEMENT FORM (AIA DOC. A101-2017) 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT (AIA DOC. A201-2017) 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS (AIA DOC. A503-2017)

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01019 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01030 ALTERNATES 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01300 SUBMITTALS 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01732 CUTTING & PATCHING 01736 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01737 ALTERATION PROCEDURES

DIVISION 2 SITEWORK

02315 EXCAVATION AND FILL 02721 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT 02750 SITE CONCRETE 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCING 02832 CHAIN LINK SLIDING GATE 02930 TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVER

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE

03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

00005 - 2

DIVISION 4 MASONRY

04100 MORTAR 04220 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 5 METALS

05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS

06112 FRAMING AND SHEATHING 06180 GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07120 FLUID APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07410 CORRUGATED METAL WALL CLADDING 07412 METAL ROOFING 07542 TPO ROOFING SYSTEM 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07900 SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08210 WOOD DOORS 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08410 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEMS 08460 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING

DIVISION 9 FINISHES

09110 NON-LOAD BEARING METAL FRAMING 09250 GYPSUM BOARD 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 660 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 09671 TEXTURED FLOOR COATINGS 09688 CARPET 09900 PAINTING 09975 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS

DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES

10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

00005 - 3

10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES

DIVISIONS 11, 12, 13, 14 – NOT USED

DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL – SEE DRAWINGS

APPENDIX A NWCB DOCUMENT 401 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

00010 - 1

SECTION 00010

INDEX OF DRAWINGS

18-17 WILCO FARM STORE

SHEET NO. SHEET TITLE DATE

A000 COVER SHEET 05/10/19

ARCHITECTURAL

A001 GENERAL NOTES AND LEGENDS 05/10/19

A002 ADA REQUIREMENTS 05/10/19

A101 SITE PLAN 05/10/19

A102 SITE DETAILS 05/10/19

FLS 01 FIRST FLOOR - FIRE & LIFE SAFETY 05/10/19

FLS 02 SECOND FLOOR - FIRE & LIFE SAFETY 05/10/19

F01 FIRST FLOOR FIXTURE PLAN 05/10/19

F02 SECOND FLOOR FIXTURE PLAN 05/10/19

D101 FIRST FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN 05/10/19

D102 SECOND FLOOR DEMOLITION PLAN 05/10/19

A201 FIRST FLOOR PLAN 05/10/19

A202 SECOND FLOOR PLAN & ENLARGED FLOOR PLANS 05/10/19

A203 FIRST FLOOR CEILING PLAN 05/10/19

A204 SECOND FLOOR CEILING PLAN 05/10/19

A205 ROOF PLAN 05/10/19

A301 EXISTING EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 05/10/19

A302 PROPOSED EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS 05/10/19

A401 SECTIONS AND DETAILS 05/10/19

A601 DOOR AND WINDOW DETAILS & SCHEDULES 05/10/19

A701 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 05/10/19



A801 INTERIOR FINISH AND MATERIAL SCHEDULES 05/10/19

CIVIL

C001 COVER SHEET 04/22/19

C050 EXISTING CONDITIONS PLAN 04/22/19

C300 DRAINAGE PLAN 04/22/19

C400 DETAILS 04/22/19

LANDSCAPE

L100 LANDSCAPE PLAN 04/19/19

L200 EXISTING SITE TREES AND TREE REMOVAL PLAN 04/19/19

STRUCTURAL

S-0 COVER SHEET 05/10/19

S-1 FOUNDATION PLAN 05/10/19

S-2 FRAMING PLAN 05/10/19

S-3 DETAILS 05/10/19

MECHANICAL

M001 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES, NOTES & LEGEND 05/10/19

M101 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN – DEMO 05/10/19

M102 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE – DEMO 05/10/19

M103 MECHANICAL ROOF PLAN - DEMO 05/10/19

M201 MECHANICAL FLOOR PLAN 05/10/19

M202 MECHANICAL MEZZANINE PLAN 05/10/19

M601 MECHANICAL DETAILS 05/10/19

00010 - 2

PLUMBING

P100 ABBREVIATIONS SYMBOLS & SCHEDULES 05/10/19

P101 FIRST FLOOR DEMO PLAN – PLUMBING 05/10/19

P102 SECOND FLOOR DEMO PLAN – PLUMBING 05/10/19

P201 FIRST FLOOR PLAN – PLUMBING 05/10/19

P202 SECOND FLOOR PLAN - DEMO 05/10/19

END OF INDEX

00020 - 1

SECTION 00020

INVITATION TO BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION:

A. Architect: Novak Architecture, Inc 17020 SW Upper Boones Ferry Road, Suite 200 Portland, Oregon 97224

B. Owner: Wilco 200 Industrial Way Mt Angel, Oregon 97362

C. Project: Wilco - Conversion 17711 Jean Way Lake Oswego, Oregon 97035

1.02 INVITATION:

A. Bidders Invitation: 1. A pre-selected list of bidders are invited to bid on a General Contract.

B. Project Description:

1. Conversion of existing structure into a new Wilco Farm Store, including interior renovations, exterior Load Out canopy, Garden Center structures, and fenced wire yard

2. Provide all associated on sitework, grading, utilities, structures, landscaping, and irrigation systems.

3. Connect all building utility lines to the underground utility systems as shown on the civil documents.

1.04 ACCESS TO BIDDING DOCUMENTS:

A. The Bidding Documents will be issued electronically in the form of PDF’s to each invited bidder for printing and/or distribution to sub-contractors, suppliers, etc. No hard copies will be issued.

1.05 BIDDING REQUIRMENTS:

A. Bid Type: Bids must be on a stipulated sum basis. B. Bid Form: Submit bid proposal on standard form included in the Bidding

Documents.

C. Furnish a listing of Subcontractors by trade and responsibility for the project to the office of the Owner within 48 hours after the bid. The Subcontractor listing shall include the following:

00020 - 2

1. Earthwork 2. Concrete 3. Unit Masonry 4. Structural Steel 5. Framing and Sheathing 6. Flooring 7. Roofing 8. Plumbing 9. Mechanical 10. Fire Protection 11. Skylights

END OF SECTION

00100 - 1

SECTION 00100

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1.01 TIME FOR DELIVERY OF BIDS: May 28, 2019 @ 5:00pm PST 1.02 ADDRESS: Wilco Corporate Office 200 Industrial Way Mt Angel, Oregon 97362 1.03 BID OPENING: Bids will be opened privately. 1.04 DEFINITIONS:

A. All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, A.I.A. Document A201, are applicable to these Bid Documents.

B. Bidding Documents include Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form and the

proposed Contract Documents, including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of bids.

C. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the

Contract. These addenda modify or interpret the Bidding Documents, including Drawings, and Specifications, by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Addenda will become part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contract is executed.

D. The Bid is the submittal, including the Bid Form and all necessary and required

attachments, which relays all requested information pertaining to the Base Bid, Alternates, Allowances, Unit Prices and Segregated Prices.

E. The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform

the Work described in the Bidding Documents, which serves as a base sum, to which work may be added or from which work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids for purposes of determining the Low Bidder. The Base Bid shall include all items of work indicated on the Drawings and/or required by specifications unless specifically noted to be excluded from the Base Bid.

F. An Alternate Price (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or

deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted.

G. A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for

materials or services as described in the Bidding Documents H. A Segregated Price is an amount stated in the Bid which represents the cost of a

specific described portion of the Base Bid. Owner reserves the right to omit segregated portions of the Bid from the Construction Contract or to contract separately for segregated portions.

00100 - 2

I. An Allowance is an amount stated on the Bid Form and included in the Base Bid

which shall be used as a budgetary amount for specified item or portion of the Work. Owner reserves the right to omit allowance items from the Construction Contract at any time for the amount stated in the Bid.

1.05 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION:

A. Each Bidder by making his Bid represents that: 1. He has read and understands the Bidding Documents and his Bid is made

in accordance therewith. 2. He has visited the site, has familiarized himself with the local conditions

under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated his observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.

3. His Bid is based upon the materials, systems and equipment required by the Bidding Documents without exception.

4. He has reviewed all sub-bids and verified that all work required by the Bidding Documents is included in the Base Bid.

5. His bid has not been subsidized nor adjusted in any way by job targeting/market recovery funds. This applies to the pricing of all work on the project including subcontractors and suppliers.

1.06 BIDDING PROCEDURES:

A. Form of Bid: Submit all bids on the forms provided in this Project Manual. Submit Bids in duplicate in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. No oral, telephone, or telegraphic Bids will be accepted. Bids may be emailed per Section 0300.

B. Receipt of Bids: A bid is invalid if it has not been deposited at the designated

location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids indicated above or prior to any extension thereof issued to the Bidders. Bidder assumes full responsibility for timely delivery.

C. Modification or Withdrawal of Bid: No Bidder shall modify, withdraw or cancel his

bid or any part thereof forty-five (45) days after the time designated for the receipt of bids.

D. Addenda: Prior to the receipt of bids, Addenda will be mailed or delivered to each

person or firm recorded by the Architect as having received the Bidding Documents and will be available for inspection wherever the Bidding Documents are kept available for that purpose. Bidder shall indicate all Addenda received on the Bid Form.

1.07 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS:

A. Each Bidder shall examine the Bidding Documents carefully and not later than five (5) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error therein which he may discover. Any interpretation or

00100 - 3

correction will be issued as an Addendum by the Architect. Only a written interpretation or correction by an Addendum shall be binding. No bidder shall rely upon any interpretation or correction given by any other method.

B. Bids shall be made from complete sets of the Bid Documents. The Owner and

Architect accept no responsibility for Bids made from incomplete sets. 1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS: Each Bidder represents that his Bid is based upon the materials and

equipment described in the Bidding Documents. No substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted to the Architect for review at least seven (7) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Each such request shall be made in writing on the form provided, and shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted, along with drawings, catalog cut sheets, performance and test data and any other data or information necessary for a complete evaluation. Favorable reviews of substitution submittals will be enumerated in an Addendum.

1.09 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS:

A. Rejection of Bids: 1. The Bidder acknowledges the right of the Owner to reject any or all Bids

and to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid received. In addition, the Bidder recognizes the right of the Owner to reject a Bid if the Bidder failed to furnish any required Bid security, or to submit the data required by the Bidding Documents, or if the Bid is in any way incomplete or irregular.

2. Bids may not exclude any work called for in the Bidding Documents. Bids containing exclusions will be disqualified.

B. Acceptance of Bid:

1. It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to accept the Bid (or Bids) which, in his judgment, is in his own best interests.

2. The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted.

1.10 POST-BID INFORMATION: Upon request by the Owner or Architect the Apparent Low

Bidder shall, within three (3) days thereafter, submit the following:

A. Schedule of Values: A statement of costs for each major item of work included in the Bid, itemized by Specification Section, or further broken down as necessary for a clear understanding of the Bid.

B. A list of names of the sub-contractors or other persons or organizations (including

those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the work. If the Owner or Architect has a reasonable and substantial objection to any person or organization on such list, and refuses, in writing, to accept such person or organization, the Bidder may, at his option, withdraw his Bid without forfeiture of bid security, not with-standing

00100 - 4

anything to the contrary contained in Item 1.06, Sub-paragraph C of Instructions to Bidders. If the Bidder submits an acceptable substitute with an adjustment in his Bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, the Owner may, at his discretion, accept the adjusted Bid price or he may disqualify the Bidder. Subcontractors and other persons and organizations proposed by the Bidder and accepted by the Owner and the Architect must be used on the work for which they were proposed and accepted and shall not be changed except with the written approval of the Owner and the Architect.

1.11 LABOR, MATERIALS, AND PERFORMANCE BONDS: Owner may elect to require

either or both a Labor and Materials Bond or Performance Bond for full amount of the Contract. General Contractor represents by submitting the Bid that they have the bonding capability for this project. Cost of bond shall be stated as an Alternate Price on the Bid Form and shall not be included in the Base Bid.

1.12 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT(S): The successful Bidder shall agree to execute a

Contract with the Owner within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of written instruction from the Owner to do so.

1.13 BIDDING DOCUMENTS: A full set of PDF’s will be provided to invited prime Bidders only

for printing and/or distribution. 1.14 DOCUMENTS ON FILE: The Owner, Architect, and Consultants have Documents solely

for the purpose of interpretation and clarification. Documents may not be issued for bid purposes at these locations.

END OF SECTION

00300 - 1

SECTION 00300 BID FORM

To: Wilco Attn: Jerad Lillegard, Project Manager 200 Industrial Way Mt Angel, Oregon 97362 email: [email protected] A. Acknowledgments: The Undersigned has:

1. Reviewed the Project Manual and Drawings for the Wilco Farm Store project located in Lake Oswego, Oregon as prepared by Novak Architecture, Inc,

2. Reviewed Addenda through inclusive (Proposal not

indicating Addendas prior to bid date will be rejected by the Owner). B. Acknowledgments: The Undersigned Has:

1. Bidder has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may effect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work.

2. Bidder has studied carefully all report and drawings of subsurface conditions and

drawings of physical conditions.

3. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or assumed responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as Bidder considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time; and not additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports or similar information or data are on will be required by Bidder for such purposes.

4. Bidder has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on

the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumed responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by Bidder in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

5. Bidder has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations,

investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

6. Bidder has given the Architect written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that it has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written

00300 - 2

resolution thereof by the Architect is acceptable to Bidder.

7. Bidder confirms that the price he has submitted has not been subsidized nor adjusted in any way by job targeting/market recovery funds. This statement applies to the pricing of all work on the project, including subcontractors and suppliers.

C. Bid Agreements: The Undersigned agrees:

1. To hold this Bid open for 30 days subject to provisions in the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.

2. That the Bid Security, attached to this proposal, is left in escrow with the Owner

as a bid guarantee. D. Award Agreements: If awarded a Contract, the Undersigned agrees:

1. To enter into the executed Contract on the Basis of this Bid.

2. To deliver to the Owner within seven (7) calendar days of the award a formal written Agreement subject to provisions in INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.

3. To commence Work no later than March 01, 2015

4. To achieve substantial completion no later than July 7, 2015. Substantial

completion is defined as the tenant being able to occupy the premises to begin installation of Tenant supplied FF&E (Furniture, Fixtures and Equipment)

E. Basic Bid: The following is the breakdown of the Basic Bid Stipulated Sum for the Project.

1. DIVISION 1 - $ General Requirements:

2. DIVISION 2- $

Site Work:

3. DIVISION 3 - $ Concrete:

4. DIVISION 4 - $

Masonry:

5. DIVISION 5 - $ Metals:

6. DIVISION 6 - $

Wood and Plastic:

00300 - 3

7. DIVISION 7 - $ Thermal and Moisture Protection:

8. DIVISION 8 - $

Door and Windows:

9. DIVISION 9 - $ Finishes:

10. DIVISION 10 - $ Specialties:

11. DIVISION 11 - $ Equipment: 12. DIVISION 13 - $ Fire Protection: 13. DIVISION 15 - $

Mechanical:

14. DIVISION 16 - $ Electrical:

15. Landscape Lump Sum: $ 20,000

16. Contractors Overhead and Fee: $ 17. Washington State Sales Tax: $ TOTAL COMBINATION BID: $

G. Contractor's Overhead and Fee for Change Orders shall be %. H. Alternate No. 1: $ I. Listing, at the Contractor's own record, any recommended solicited substitution from the

Contractor Documents:

SUBSTITUTIONS / UNSOLICITED ALTERNATES

DESCRIPTION DEDUCT ADD

$ $

$ $

$ $

00300 - 4

J. Signatures:

1. Signature for Individuals:

Name: (Signature of Individual)

2. Signature for Partnership:

Names of Partners Name of Partnership

Signature of Partner Signing

3. Signature for Corporation:

Corporation Name:

Name and Title of Officer or Agent Signing (Signature of Officer or Agent)

NOTE: Please print or type the information requested above, excluding signatures.

END OF SECTION

00500 - 1

DOCUMENT 00500

AGREEMENT FORM

AIA Document A101-2017 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Stipulated Sum will be used. General Contractors bidding the project shall obtain a copy of this document.

END OF SECTION

00700 - 1

SECTION 00700

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

AIA Document A201-2017 General Conditions of the Contract will be used. General Contractors bidding the project shall obtain a copy of this document. END OF SECTION

00800 - 1

SECTION 00800

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

AIA Document A503-2017, Guide for Supplementary Conditions will be used. General Contractors bidding the project shall obtain a copy of this document.

END OF SECTION

01010 - 1

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Work by Contractor. 2. Work by Owner. 3. Definitions. 4. Contractor Designed Elements. 5. Contractor use of site and premises. 6. Work Sequence. 7. Owner occupancy.

1.02 WORK BY CONTRACTOR

A. The work of this Contract comprises the conversion and renovation of the approximate 43,425 s.f. Retail Building in Lake Oswego, Oregon. This project consists of the construction of the building exterior and interior improvements, the complete mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems, all walls, ceilings, floor coverings, and finishes, exterior garden center structures, load-out canopy, as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

B. Contractor's Duties: 1. Provide and pay for labor, materials, tools, equipment, superintendence,

temporary facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of work.

2. Pay legally required sales, consumer and use taxes. 3. Coordinate and arrange for:

a. Plan Check and Permits for all Mechanical, Electrical and Plumbing work including payment of the same.

b. Utility hook-ups, including water meters, pits meter valves, sanitary sewer, etc.

c. All other required permits, governmental fees and licenses. d. Coordinate design and permitting of Contractor Designed and Deferred

Submittal items, as noted on the drawings and below in item 1.05. 4. Owner will pay for:

a. Plan Check and Building Permit. b. Utility hook-up fees.

5. Comply with building codes, ordinances and regulations of public authorities.

C. Agreement Form: Construct Work under "Stipulated Sum" Contract, AIA Document A101, 2007 Edition, or other form acceptable to Owner.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. General Requirements: Provisions or requirements of Divisions 1 sections apply to entire Contract.

01010 - 2

B. Directed, Requested, etc: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed",

"requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted" mean "directed by Architect", "requested by Architect", etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Architect's responsibility into Contractor's area of construction supervision and material quality control.

C. Furnish: Expect as otherwise defined in greater detail, "furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver products to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance.

D. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail "install" is used to describe

operations at project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

E. Provide: Except as otherwise noted defined in greater detail, "provide" means to

furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance. 1.05 CONTRACTOR DESIGNED ELEMENTS

A. Where work of this Contract requires bidder/designer to comply with following: 1. Submit Shop Drawings and Calculations to Architect for review. 2. Submit Shop Drawings and Calculations to the local jurisdictions for approval and

permits. 3. If required by local jurisdiction, all mechanical, plumbing, electrical and structural

Shop Drawings and Calculation shall be stamped by Registered Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located.

B. Contractor “Bidder” Designed schedule (includes engineering and permitting): 1. Fire suppression and alarm system modifications 3. Steel guardrails 4. Wood trusses at new Load Out canopy 5. Wrought iron fencing and gates at Wire Yard and Garden Center 1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. Limit use of Site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Others.

B. Confine operations at Site to areas permitted by:

1. Law. 2. Ordinances. 3. Permits. 4. Contract Documents.

C. Construction Operations:

1. Do not unreasonably encumber site with materials and/or equipment. 2. Do not load structure with weight which could endanger structure.

01010 - 3

D. Time Restrictions for Performing Work: As required by local governing jurisdiction and by Covenance and Conditions for the property.

E. Storage: Refer also to Section 01600.

1. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises.

2. Move stored products which interfere with operations of Owner or Owner's Contractors.

3. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas required by operations.

1.07 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Construct Work to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements. During construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner and Architect.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

01019 - 1

SECTION 01019

CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Schedule of Values. 2. Application for Payment. 3. Change procedures. 4. Alternates.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01030 - Alternates. 2. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions and alternates.

1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G702-2017 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet.

B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 7 days after date of bids.

C. Format: Utilize Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with

number and title of major specification Section. Identify bonds and insurance, overhead, and profit.

D. Include separately from each line item, directly proportional amount of Contractor's

overhead and profit.

E. Indicate anticipated cash flow on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project, based on the information in the construction schedule.

F. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment.

1.03 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Submit three (3) notarized copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment.

B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for

Payment.

C. Retainage amount for the Application and Certificate for Payment is established at 10% of the amount of work completed and materials stored on-site as of the date of payment request.

01019 - 2

D. Retainage amounts will be paid to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract

Documents and conditional upon Owners lender requirements for contractor being satisfied.

E. Payment Period: Monthly.

F. Include Lien Release forms required by Owner.

1.04 CHANGE PROCEDURES

A. Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in Work not involving adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201-2017 by issuing supplemental instructions on AIA Form G710-2017

B. Architect/Engineer may issue Proposal Request which includes detailed description of proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, change in Contract Time for executing change. Contractor will prepare and submit estimate within ten days.

C. Contractor may propose change by submitting request for change to

Architect/Engineer, describing proposed change and its full effect on Work. Include statement describing the reason for change, and effect on Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and statement describing effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600.

D. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's

fixed price quotation or Contractor's request for Change Order as approved by Architect/Engineer.

E. Complete accounting to obtain new Contract Sum and new Date of Completion.

F. Submit five signed copies to the Architect for his review. Architect will forward onto the

Owner after his review.

G. Submit an itemized breakdown of labor and materials including overheads and profit with each Change Order. Submit copies of estimating sheets to the Architect upon request.

H. Construction Change Directive:

1. Architect/Engineer may issue directive, on AIA Form G714 Construction Change Directive instructing Contractor to proceed with change in Work, for subsequent inclusion in Change Order.

2. Document will describe changes in Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time.

3. Promptly execute change.

01019 - 3

I. Maintain detailed records of work done. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in Work.

J. Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order.

K. Comply with Document 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS for overhead and profit

calculations on the Change Order Form.

L. Execution of Change Orders: Architect/Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of Contract.

1.05 ALTERNATES

A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement.

B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

01030 - 1

SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Submission procedures. 2. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time.


1. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations. 2. Section 01300 - Submittals: Work schedule affected by Alternates.

1.02 REQUIREMENTS

A. Specific and detailed items of work related to Alternates are described in other Sections of these Specifications and on Drawings.

B. Submit Alternates with full description of proposed Alternate and affect on adjacent or

related components.

C. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate Work of each Alternate.

D. Indicate variation of Bid Price for Alternates described below and list in Bid Form

Document or any supplement to it, which requests 'difference' in Bid Price by adding to or deducting from base bid price.

1.03 SELECTION AND AWARD OF ALTERNATIVES

A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement.

B. Bid will be evaluated on base bid price. After determination of preferred bidder,

consideration will be given to Alternates and Bid Price Adjustments. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

01039- 1

SECTION 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS


A. Section Includes:

1. Coordination. 2. Field engineering. 3. Project Survey Requirements. 4. Alteration project procedures. 5. Cutting and patching. 6. Preconstruction conference. 7. Progress meetings. 8. Pre-installation conferences.

1.02 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall be responsible for locating and verifying all utility service connection points inclusive of water, sanitary sewer, storm drainage, electrical, telephone, gas service, and any other services as described herein and as shown on the Drawings, and as reflected in the sitework civil development drawings and specifications. Contractor shall be responsible for accurately locating depths of such utilities and shall coordinate all building shell utilities with the actual in place sitework utilities. If discrepancies between sitework and building utilities should arise, the Contractor shall modify or remedy at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate uses of the site and building areas with the sitework

effort. During the course of construction, damages which may occur to finished asphalt paving, concrete curbs, site utilities, site fixtures, etc., shall be remedied by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Contractor shall coordinate with the sitework that the building pad is at the actual

designed elevation, and that all soils testing criteria and requirements have been achieved. Commencement with the scope of work constitutes acceptance by the Contractor. Any discrepancies discovered after the start of such work shall be remedied by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner, unless written agreement is acquired prior to commencement of such work.

D. Assume full responsibility for overall coordination of Project:

1. Coordinate with Building Official. 2. Coordinate with Owner's inspecting and testing service. 3. Coordinate work schedule with Architect and Owner's Representative. 4. Coordinate among work of all trades. 5. Provide access to construction area for other Contractors.

E. Coordinate Work of Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors: 1. With work of trades and suppliers of products specified in Divisions 2 through 10. 2. Among work of trades and suppliers of products specified in Division 15 and 16.

01039- 2

3. For temporary utilities work specified in Division 1.

F. Coordinate changes to assure that: 1. Requirements of Contract Documents are fulfilled. 2. Changes in Contract requirements of all affected trades are reflected in executed

Change Orders. G. Scheduling and Installation Sequence:

1. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

2. Schedule work in accordance with current Project Construction Schedule. a. Coordinate schedules of all trades. b. Verify timely deliveries of products for installation by other trades. c. Verify that labor and equipment are adequate for work and schedule. d. Verify that material deliveries are adequate to maintain schedule.

H. Utility Requirements:

1. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities.

2. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

I. Space Requirements:

1. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings.

2. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building.

3. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

J. Provide adequate clearance between Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, and

Electrical systems. Verify physical dimensions of equipment with its available space. Check access routs through concealed spaces.

K. Review Drawings and Specifications for the possible conflicts prior to rough-in.

Contractor is responsible for verification that equipment will fit in the space provided. Resolve conflicts with Architect prior to rough-in work. Commencing work constitutes that the Contractor has reviewed the type of equipment and that the space allowance is sufficient for total installation of such equipment. The Contractor shall provide any modifications to equipment and space allowances at no additional cost to the Owner.

L. Concealed Services:

1. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. 2. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

M. Cutting and Patching: Ascertain need for cutting and patching, and coordinate with

work of other trades.

N. Provide daily coordination of site maintenance and clean-up. Do not let materials or debris be disorganized.

01039- 3

O. Completion and Clean Up:

1. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion.

P. Start-Up, Inspection and Acceptance of Equipment:

1. Verify that Manufacturer's representative is present. 2. Verify that utilities, specified connections and safety devices are complete, and

equipment is ready to operate. 3. Verify that equipment has been tested, adjusted and balanced, is cleaned,

repainted as required, and operational prior to inspection.

Q. Access for Corrective Work: 1. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to Site for correction of

defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

1.03 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Employ Land Surveyor registered in State in which the project is located acceptable to the Owner.

B. Owner will locate survey control and reference points. Contractor shall protect.

C. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey.

D. Provide and pay for field engineering services as follows: 1. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey

practices. 2. Survey and staking work required in execution of the Project as defined herein. 3. Civil, structural, or other professional engineering services specified, or required

to execute Contractor's construction methods. 4. Survey and staking of all existing underground utilities within the proposed area

of building and adjacent site construction. Coordinate with the General Contractor of the Site Civil Development Package.

E. Submit certificate signed by Land Surveyor that elevations and locations of Work are in

conformance with Contract Documents. 1.04 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks for each building on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar

appropriate means: 1. Batter boards for structures. 2. Building foundation, column locations and floor levels. 3. Controlling lines and levels required for the mechanical and electrical trades.

C. From time to time, verify layouts by the same methods.

01039- 4

D. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses.

E. On completion of foundation walls and major building shell structure improvements,

prepare a certified survey showing all dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction. Submit three (3) copies to Owner.

F. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work.

1.05 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

A. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes

of temperature and humidity.

C. Remove, cut, and patch work in manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products and finishes to original condition.

D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to

specified condition for each material, with neat transition to adjacent finishes.

E. Transition Between New and Existing: 1. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform smooth and even

transition. 2. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. 3. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with new work is not

possible, terminate existing surface along straight line at natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect.

4. Where change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing smooth transition for Architect review.

F. Damaged Surfaces: Patch or replace, as directed by Architect, portions of existing

surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections.

G. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections. 1.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching.

B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.

C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work,

and to:

01039- 5

1. Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and

electrical Work.

D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.

F. Provide shoring, bracing, and support as required to maintain structural integrity of the

project.

G. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

H. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through

surfaces.

I. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids.

J. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

K. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during Work to Architect for

decision or remedy.

1.07 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. Contractor shall schedule conference after Notice of Award.

B. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and

progress schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing parties in Contract, and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions,

applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures.

7. Scheduling. 8. Security and housekeeping procedures. 9. Procedures for testing. 10. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents.

C. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Special Consultants, Contractor, Contractor's

Superintendent, and major Subcontractors.

01039- 6

1.08 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Contractor shall schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of Work at maximum weekly intervals.

B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside

at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,

Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work

1.09 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES

A. When required in individual specification Section, convene pre-installation conference at work site prior to commencing work of Section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of specific Section.

C. Notify Architect and Owner seven days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within

two days after conference to participants, with two copies to Architect. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and

coordination with related work. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

01300 - 1

SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS


A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal procedures. 2. Construction progress schedules. 3. Proposed products list. 4. Product data. 5. Shop drawings. 6. Samples. 7. Manufacturers' instructions. 8. Manufacturers' certificates. 9. Submittal quantities. 10. Submittal schedule.


1. Section 01030 - Alternates. 2. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers' field services and reports. 3. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranty, manufacturer's certificates

and closeout submittals. 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. All submittals shall be submitted within 60 days after date of Owner Contractor Agreement.

B. Sequentially number transmittal forms. Re-submittals shall have original number with

alphabetic suffix.

C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate.

D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of

Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with requirements of Work and Contract Documents.

E. Schedule submittals to expedite Project, and deliver to Architect at business address.

Coordinate submission of related items.

F. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of completed Work.

G. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.

H. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous

submittal.

01300 - 2

I. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to

promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES

A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement for Architect review.

B. Revise and resubmit as required.

C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since

previous version.

D. Submit computer generated chart with separate line for each major section of Work or operation, identifying first work day of each week.

E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate

stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration.

F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.

G. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and

product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances. 1.04 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST

A. Within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.

B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name,

model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.05 PRODUCT DATA

A. Submit product data required by Contract Documents for execution of work, to Architect not later than 60 days after the date of Owner Contractor Agreement, and earlier where more time may be required for review.

B. Provide product data with cross-reference to Specifications Section of Project Manual to

facilitate review. C. Provide product data including manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams,

schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data.

D. Submit number of copies which Contractor requires, plus three copies which will be retained by Architect.

E. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.

01300 - 3

Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project.

F. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.

1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit Shop Drawings, required by Contract Documents for execution of Work, to Architect not later than 30 days after date of Owner Contractor Agreement or earlier where more time may be required for review.

B. Provide Shop Drawings, with cross-reference to drawing and detail numbers on

Contract Drawings to facilitate review.

C. Provide Shop Drawings which demonstrate to Architect that: 1. Contractor understands design concept of certain portions of Work. 2. Equipment and material to be provided meet design and technical requirements

of Contract Documents. 3. Methods of fabrication and installation.

D. Submit in form of one reproducible transparency and five opaque reproductions.

E. After review, reproduce and distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above

and for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.07 SAMPLES

A. Submit samples of size and quantity specified, or, if not specified, of sufficient size and quantity to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

B. Submit samples of finishes from full range of manufacturers' standard colors or in

custom colors selected, textures, and patterns for Architect's selection.

C. Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.

D. Submit number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which will be retained by Architect.

E. Reviewed samples which may be used in Work are indicated in individual specification

Sections.

1.08 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents.

01300 - 4

1.09 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES

A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Architect for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.

B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect.

1.10 REQUIRED SUBMITTAL QUANTITIES TO ARCHITECT: Reproducible Opaque Transparencies Prints

A. Construction Schedule: 1. 8-½" x 11" size: 0 3 2. Larger than 8-½" x 11": 1 3

B. Survey Data:

1. 8-½" x 11": 0 3 2. Larger than 8-½" x 11": 1 3

C. Shop Drawings:

1. 8-½" x 11": 0 3 2. Larger than 8-½" x 11": 1 3

D. Product Data:

1. 8-½" x 11": 0 3 2. Larger than 8-½" x 11": 1 3

E. Office Samples: See specific section covering product or material.

F. Schedule of Values: 0 3

1.11 SCHEDULE FOR SUBMITTALS: Architect Update and

Contractor First Submittal Review In Resubmit In (No. of Days) (No. of Days) (No. of Days)

A. Construction 15 after award of 5 30 Schedule: contract

B. Survey Data: 15 after award of 15 —

contract

C. Shop Drawings: 30 after award 15 —

D. Product Data: 30 after award 15 —

E. Samples: 30 after award 15 —

01300 - 5

F. Schedule of Prior to application 5 30

Values: for payment PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION

01400 - 1

SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL


A. Section Includes: 1. Quality assurance and control of installation. 2. References. 3. Field samples. 4. Mock-up. 5. Inspection and testing laboratory services. 6. Contractor's Inspection and Testing Responsibilities. 7. Manufacturers' field services and reports.


1. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates.

2. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality.

3. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. 4. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Compacted Fill and Backfill. 5. Section 03300 - Cast-in-place concrete: Cast-in-Place. 6. Section 04100 - Mortar 7. Section 04220 - Unit Masonry.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification from Architect before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to

withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 1.03 REFERENCES

A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents

or date specified in product Sections.

01400 - 2

B. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents.

C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification for Architect before proceeding.

D. Contractual relationship of parties to Contract shall not be altered from Contract

Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.04 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Install field samples at Site as required by individual specifications Sections for review.

B. Acceptable samples represent quality level for Work.

C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field sample has been accepted by Architect.

1.05 MOCK-UP

A. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

B. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after

mock-up has been accepted by Architect. 1.06 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of independent firm to perform inspection and testing.

B. Independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in

individual specification Sections and as required by Architect or Engineer.

C. Reports will be submitted by independent firm to Owner, Contractor, Architect and Engineers, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.

1.07 CONTRACTOR'S INSPECTION AND TESTING RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperate with independent firm. 1. Furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and

assistance as requested. 2. Provide access to Work and manufacturer's operations. 3. Notify Architect and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for

operations requiring services. 4. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and

tests required for Contractor's use. 5. Furnish copies of mill test reports. 6. Furnish casual labor and facilities:

a. to provide access work to be tested. b. to obtain and handle samples at Site.

01400 - 3

c. to facilitate inspection and tests. d. for laboratories exclusive use for storage and curing of test samples.

7. Arrange with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's convenience.

B. Retesting:

1. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by same independent firm on instructions by Architect.

2. Should initial tests indicate non-compliance with Contract Documents, payment for both initial tests and subsequent retesting occasioned by non-compliance, and all costs, including additional Architect's services made necessary by such failure, will be charged to Contractor by deducting inspection or testing charges from Contract Sum/Price.

1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS

A. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect.

B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product

suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

C. Observer shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to

applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

D. Submit report within 15 days of observation to Architect for review.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION

01410 - 1

SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION:

A. Owner will employ and pay for such services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection, sampling, and testing as required by local building codes.

B. Referenced Sections:

1. Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE 2. Section 04100 - MORTAR. 3. Section 04200 - UNIT MASONRY 4. Structural Drawings – Special Inspections Program

PART 2 MATERIALS – NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES: Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide

access to work, and furnish facilities for laboratory work. 3.02 EVALUATION OF TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:

A. Results of laboratory and/or field control tests and inspections shall be the principal basis upon which satisfactory completion of work shall be judged.

B. If results of tests and inspections indicate work is below requirements of Contract

Documents, that portion of work is subjected to condemnation. 3.03 ADJUSTMENTS: Remove and replace work so condemned at Contractor's expense

including costs of subsequent tests and inspections, and assistance by the Architect and Structural Engineer until work meets requirements of Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION

01500 - 1

SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS


A. Section Includes: 1. Temporary Utilities. 2. Temporary Controls. 3. Construction Facilities. 4. Removal of temporary utilities, controls and facilities.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning. 1.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Temporary Electricity: 1. Provide and pay for power service required from Utility source. 2. Provide temporary electric feeder from existing electrical service at location as

directed. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's or other contractors need for continuous service.

3. Provide flexible power cords as required. 4. Permanent convenience receptacles may not be utilized during construction.

B. Temporary Lighting: 1. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve

a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft. 2. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas

after dark for security purposes. 3. Provide and maintain lighting to interior work areas after dark for security

purposes. 4. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting

conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. 5. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. 6. Permanent building lighting may not be utilized during construction.

C. Temporary Heat:

1. Existing facilities shall not be used. 2. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified

conditions for construction operations. 3. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where

construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. D. Temporary Ventilation:

1. Ventilate enclosed areas to: a. Assist cure of materials. b. Dissipate humidity. c. Prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. d. Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful dispersal of hazardous

substances into atmosphere at all times.

01500 - 2

2. Provide ventilation and/or heat to dry out underside of roof deck prior to installing

insulation or finish.

E. Temporary Telephone and Facsimile (FAX) Service: 1. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service and facsimile (FAX) machine, on

dedicated line, to field office at time of project mobilization. a. Toll calls paid by party making call. b. Equip telephone with outside bell.

2. Maintain services from start of work through Substantial Completion. 3. Should project not be equipped with a fax, a total of $100.00 per week will be

deducted from the contract amount at the end of the project.

F. Temporary Water Service: 1. Provide, maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required. Connect to

existing water source for construction operations. 2. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with

threaded connections.

G. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: 1. Provide and maintain adequate number of required facilities and enclosures for

use of all persons and trades employed on Work during Construction period. Existing facilities shall not be used. a. Toilet facilities. b. Washing facilities.

H. Temporary First Aid Facilities: Provide adequate first aid facilities for construction

personnel.

I. Temporary Fire Protection: 1. Take all precautions to prevent possibility of fire resulting from construction

operations. Particularly avoid hazardous accumulations of rubbish and unsecured flammable materials.

2. Provide emergency fire extinguishing equipment of adequate type and quantity, readily available and properly maintained.

3. Keep local Fire Department's telephone number prominently displayed near telephone.

4. During construction, provide a portable fire extinguisher with type 2A10BC rating within 75 foot distance to all portions of the job.

1.03 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. Barriers: 1. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to

protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.

2. Provide barricades required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way. 3. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from

damage. B. Fencing:

1. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.

01500 - 3

2. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction materials storage area; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks.

C. Water Control:

1. Exercise care in cleaning out equipment, etc., so as to prevent materials from clogging catch basins and yard drains.

2. Leave all drainage items clean and in proper working condition.

D. Dust Control: 1. Periodically wet down Site as required to keep flying dust to minimum. 2. Vacuum clean interior surfaces of building prior to start of finish painting. 3. Continue vacuum cleaning on as-needed basis until building is ready for

Substantial Completion or occupancy.

E. Pollution Control: 1. Burning or burying of rubbish and waste materials on Site is prohibited. Provide

dump box for collection of waste materials. 2. Disposal of volatile fluid wastes (such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner) in

storm or sanitary sewer systems is prohibited. 3. Keep Site and surrounding areas clear of accumulations of waste material and

rubbish resulting from operations under this Contract. Remove waste from Site immediately upon completion of Work.

F. Exterior Enclosures:

1. Provide temporary weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.

2. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

G. Protection of Installed Work: 1. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in

individual specification Sections. 2. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control

activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. 3. Provide and maintain temporary shoring and lateral bracing of structure during

erection to resist all loads including: a. Wind. b. Seismic. c. Construction. d. Materials. e. Moving Equipment.

4. Do not remove temporary bracing and shoring until adequate permanent connections or structural elements are in final position and positively anchored.

5. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

6. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

7. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or

activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing

01500 - 4

or roofing material manufacturer. 8. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 9. Protect existing curbs and pavements from damage during construction activities.

Repair or replace damaged areas.

H. Security: 1. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from

unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 2. Provide temporary locks and doors at all openings after building is enclosed. 3. Coordinate with Owner's security program.

1.04 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

A. Access Roads: 1. Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve

construction area. 2. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for

unimpeded traffic flow. 3. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. 4. Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic. 5. Provide barricades, warning signs, flagmen or other traffic regulators which may

become necessary for protection of public, construction personnel and property.

B. Parking: 1. Provide temporary surface parking areas to accommodate construction

personnel, project visitors and Owner's employees. 2. Do not allow vehicle parking on existing pavement other than the specific area

authorized by Owner. C. Progress Cleaning:

1. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

2. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing space.

3. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

4. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site.

D. No signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law. E. Field Offices and Sheds:

1. Office: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture, and drawing display table, telephone, facsimile machine, and emergency first aid facilities.

2. Provide space for project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6

persons. 3. Photocopy machine shall be capable of legal and letter size plain paper. (Should

project not be equipped with a suitable photocopy machine, a total of $100.00

01500 - 5

per week will be deducted from the contract amount at the end of the project.) 4. Sheds: Provide following facilities in temporary buildings used for material and

equipment storage. a. Ventilation: Where required for materials being stored. b. Fire Extinguisher: One ABC type portable fire extinguisher, and one

specialty type fire extinguisher if so required for specific materials stored. c. Temperatures: As required for materials being stored.

1.05 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, CONTROLS AND FACILITIES

A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection.

B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore

permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION

01600 - 1

SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT


A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions. 2. Transportation and handling. 3. Storage and protection. 4. Materials and Equipment. 5. Manufactured and fabricated products. 6. Product options and substitutions.


1. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations. 2. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: 1. New material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming

Work. 2. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication,

conveying and erection of Work. 3. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse.

1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Coordinate product deliveries to avoid work schedule conflicts or delays.

B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Deliver products undamaged, in manufacturers original containers with labels intact

and legible.

D. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises.

B. Store stockpiled materials in designated areas.

01600 - 2

C. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures.

D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.

E. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide

ventilation to avoid condensation.

F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in well-drained area. Provide mixing with foreign matter.

G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,

disfigurement, or damage.

H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All materials and equipment shall be new (except existing items specifically designated for reuse) and free from defects impairing strength, durability, or appearances. 1. When two or more items of same kind are required under work, use items of

single manufacturer except where specifically exempted. 2. Electrical products shall bear Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) label properly

attached in accordance with requirements of Regulatory Agencies.

B. All items incorporated into Work shall conform to Contract Documents and designated standards.

2.02 MANUFACTURED AND FABRICATED PRODUCTS

A. Design, fabricate and assemble products in accordance with current best engineering, industry, and shop practices.

B. Provide interchangeable components of same manufacturer, for similar components.

C. Contract Documents are based upon specific manufacturers listed in various

Specification sections. Alternate manufacturers may require deviations from Contract Documents to properly install their particular product and to provide required results. 1. Provide all additional work necessary to install such products, if approved, at no

extra charge to Owner. 2. Submit Shop Drawings showing all deviations from Contract Documents for each

specific item. 2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Architect will consider requests for Substitutions only within 15 days after date

01600 - 3

established in Notice to Proceed.

B. Consideration: Requests for substitution of specified products after the notice to proceed time frame will be considered only for the following reasons: 1. Owner's or Architect's request. 2. Reduction in contract time or contract sum. 3. Specified product is not available from any source. 4. Specified product would cause significant delay in contract time.

C. Submittal: Submit requests on attached Substitution Request Form.

D. Substitutions may be considered when product becomes unavailable through no fault

of Contractor.

E. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents.

F. Substitution Request constitutes representation that Contractor:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds quality level of specified product.

2. Will provide same warranty for Substitution as for specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be

required for Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently

become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval

by authorities.

G. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents.

H. Substitution Submittal Procedure:

1. Submit three copies of Substitution Request Form. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution.

2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to proposed product equivalence.

3. Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine existing conditions, Project requirements and Contract Documents. Verify that materials and equipment furnished meet specified requirements.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Perform Work, handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with manufacturers' printed Instructions, and with Contract Document

01600 - 4

requirements.

B. In case of conflict, Contract Documents shall govern. When in doubt, request clarification.

END OF SECTION

01700 - 1

SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT


A. Section Includes: 1. Closeout procedures. 2. Final cleaning. 3. Adjusting. 4. Project record documents. 5. Operation and maintenance data. 6. Warranties. 7. Spare parts and maintenance materials.


1. Section 01300 - Submittals. 2. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress

cleaning. 1.02 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Substantial Completion: 1. Submit written certification to Architect that Work, or designated portion of Work,

is substantially complete. 2. If Architect determines upon review, that Work is substantially complete:

a. Contractor shall submit list of items requiring completion or correction as determined by Architect's review.

b. Contractor shall obtain Certificate of Occupancy, and perform Final cleaning.

c. Architect will prepare and issue Certificate of Substantial Completion. d. Owner may occupy Project, or designated portion of Project, under

provisions of Certificate of Substantial Completion. 3. If Architect determines that Work is not substantially complete Architect will

immediately notify Contractor in writing. Contractor shall complete and notify Architect when work is substantially complete.

B. Reinspection Fees:

1. Should Architect perform more than one reinspection due to failure of the work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor: a. Owner will compensate Architect for such additional services. b. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment

to the Contractor.

C. Final Review: 1. Submit written certification that Contractor has reviewed Contract Documents

and inspected Work, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review.

2. If Architect determines upon review that work is complete, Architect will notify

01700 - 2

Contractor and request Project Record Documents, Warranties, bonds, spare parts, maintenance materials, keys, keying schedule and Certificate of Occupancy.

3. If Architect determines upon review, that Work is not complete, Architect will notify Contractor in writing, stating reasons. Contractor shall complete work and repair deficiencies. Architect will re-review Work after Contractor's notification that all Work is complete.

D. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities.

E. Payments and Release of Liens: 1. Submit two executed copies of Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and

Claims, AIA G706. 2. Submit two executed copies of Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens AIA

G706A, including consent of Surety to Final Payment, AIA G707 and Contractor's release or waiver of liens.

F. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous

payments, and sum remaining due. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.

B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

C. Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition.

D. Clean filters of operating equipment.

E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from Site. H. Maintain Work in clean condition until Owner's Final Acceptance.

1.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

B. Refer to Division 15 - Mechanical for adjusting of Mechanical systems. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on Site, one set of following Record Documents; record actual revisions to Work: 1. Contract Drawings.

01700 - 3

2. Project Manual (Conditions of Contract and Specifications.) 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to Contract. 5. Reviewed Shop Drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Field test records.

B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.

C. Record information concurrent with construction progress must be maintained weekly.

Recorded documents will be reviewed at each meeting.

D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.

E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual

construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

F. Architect will arrange for the Contractor to obtain reproducibles for transfer of

Contractor design/build drawings and record drawing information by the Contractor. Cost of Vellum reproducibles will be paid by the Contractor. Final certified "As-Built" reproducible Vellum shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect before final payment is requested.

G. Delete Architect title block and seal from all documents.

H. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment.

I. Mark "As-Built" and date on documents in lower right-hand corner and provide two (2)

full sets of blackline prints. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit one set 15 days prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, three D side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers.

B. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.

C. Prepare Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description

identified, typed on 24 pound white paper.

01700 - 4

D. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized

as described below; with tab titles clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,

Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and

subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended

cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including following:

a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. e. List of spare parts and maintenance materials.

E. Submit three (3) final volumes, within ten days prior to final Application for Payment

and after final inspection. 1.07 WARRANTIES

A. Provide duplicate notarized copies.

B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.

C. Provide binder cover, Table of Contents, tabulated list of products, beginning date and expiration date for warranties and name and address of party to contact in case of claim against warranty. Assemble with warranties in three D side ring binder with durable plastic cover.

D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.

E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated

submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

1.08 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials, with labels, in quantities specified in individual specification Sections.

01700 - 5

B. Deliver to Owner's storage area and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

C. Tabulate list of spare parts and maintenance materials. Indicate product description,

Specifications paragraph listing product, and quantity of product delivered to Owner. Include list at end of "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION" binder.

1.09 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL:

A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems.

B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction.

1. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.

2. Review complete heating and cooling cycles with Owner's personnel. Review location of dampers, valves and control equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION

01732 - 1

SECTION 01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Requirements for cutting, fitting, and patching of Work required to: 1. Make several parts fit properly. 2. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract

Documents. 4. Remove and replace defective work.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Refer to individual Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching.

B. Divisions 15 and 16, for mechanical and electrical requirements and limitations

applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where cutting and patching involves structural elements, submit for approval a proposal describing procedures.

Include the following information in the proposal:

1. Describe extent of cutting and patching required, how it will be performed, and why it cannot be avoided.

2. Indicate changes to structural elements, and changes in appearance of visual elements. Include structural calculations.

3. List products proposed for use and entities that will perform the Work. 4. Indicate dates that work will be performed, duration of the Work, and when work

will be uncovered for Architect’s observation. 5. List utilities that cutting and patching work will affect. 6. Submit cost estimate and secure Architect’s approval of cost estimate and type

of reimbursement before proceeding with cutting and patching. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load carrying capacity or load deflection ratio. 1. Obtain approval before cutting and patching structural elements. 2. Contractor is to obtain and review concrete slab testing reports from Wilco

prior to cutting any slab areas. The tenant and architect are to be notified immediately of any concerns about report or if any unusual conditions are discovered during the slab cutting.

B. Do not cut and patch operating elements in a manner that would reduce their capacity

01732 - 2

to perform as intended, cause increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Do not cut and patch exposed elements of construction that in Architect’s opinion

would reduce visual aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. 1. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unacceptable

manner. D. Full as-built drawings were not available during the preparation of the construction

documents. The contractor is responsible for investigating existing conditions and notifying the architect and tenant of any unusual conditions or conditions which are contradictory to what is shown in the Drawings and Project Manual.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Cut and patch construction using methods and with materials in such a manner as to not void any warranties required or existing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Use new materials identical to existing materials.

B. Exposed surfaces: Where identical materials are not available, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces as nearly as possible.

C. Use materials whose installed performance is equal or better to that of existing

materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling.

B. After uncovering Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new Work. C. Discrepancies: If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify

Architect and secure direction before proceeding further. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary support of work to be cut, including shoring and bracing as required to maintain structural integrity of Work.

B. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

01732 - 3

3.03 GENERAL PERFORMANCE

A. Use skilled workers trained and experienced in necessary crafts and familiar with requirements and methods required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Where required perform excavating and backfilling in accordance with applicable

requirements of Division 2 Sections of these Specifications.

D. Provide dust proof barriers where necessary to protect existing surfaces.

3.04 CUTTING

A. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will provided least damage to other portions of Work.

B. Prior to cutting existing work, locate concealed utilities to eliminate possibility of service

interruption or damage.

C. Cut through concrete or masonry with a carborundum masonry saw or diamond-core drill.

D. When masonry construction must be pieced, furnish and install a steel pipe sleeve in

opening and grout in place neatly. 1. Leave grout surface to match existing finish. 2. Fabricate sleeve one inch in diameter larger than pipe or insulation. 3. Back and caulk between sleeve and pipe with waterproof sealant. 4. At penetrations of fire-resistant rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor

construction: Seal voids with fire-resistant rated materials as required to maintain assembly of fire-resistant rating of penetrated element, or as required by Building Code.

3.05 PATCHING

A. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide a finished installation complying with tolerances and finishes specified for type of construction involved.

B. Where replacement of equipment and fixtures is required, restore existing plumbing,

heating, ventilation, air-conditioning, electrical, and similar systems to full operational condition.

C. Refinish surfaces to match existing adjacent finish, patching with seams that are

durable and as invisible as possible. 1. Where possible, inspect and test patched area to demonstrate integrity of seam. 2. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. 3. For assembly, refinish entire unit. 4. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into

retained adjoining work in manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

D. When finished surfaces are cut so that smooth transition with existing or new work is

not possible, submit to Architect, for approval, recommendation for terminating surface

01732 - 4

along straight line at natural line of division. 1. Where change of plane of ¼ inch or more occurs, submit to Architect, for

approval, recommendation for providing smooth transition. 3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching work is performed. END OF SECTION

01736 - 1

SECTION 01736 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION


A. Demolition and removed from site those items scheduled to be demolished and removed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS – NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. 1. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of work. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 DEMOLITION

A. Verify location and extent of selective demolition to be performed.

B. In company with Owner and Architect, visit site and verify extent and location of selective demolition required. 1. Carefully identify limits of selective demolition. 2. Mark interface surfaces as required to enable workmen to identify items to be

removed and items to be left in place intact.

C. Prepare and follow an organized plan for demolition and removal of items. 1. Shut off, cap, and otherwise protect existing public utility lines in accordance with

requirements of public agency or utility having jurisdiction. 2. Remove items or portion of items scheduled to be demolished or removed,

leaving surfaces clean, and solid. 3. Comply with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

D. Demolished material shall be considered to be property of Contractor and removed

from job site. 1. Dispose of lead bearing materials in a manner and location in compliance with

current federal, state, and local regulations. 2. Notify owner of disposal location prior to removal.

E. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to public, neighbors, and

to other work being performed on or near site.

01736 - 2

3.03 REPLACEMENTS

A. In event of demolition of items not so scheduled to be demolished, promptly replace such items to approval of Architect and at no additional cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION

01737- 1

SECTION 01737 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES


A. Products and installation for patching and extending Work. B. Transition and adjustments.

C. Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning.


A. Section 01010: Summary of Work, for work sequence, Owner occupancy, and protection of installed work.

B. Section 01732: Cutting and Patching.

C. Section 01732: Selective Demolition.

D. Section 01740: Cleaning, for cleaning during construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK

A. New Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing Products and work for patching and extending work. 1. Where new materials are indicated in the Drawings and product Section for

material is not included in the Project Manual, provide new materials as specified in the Drawings.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspection and testing Products

where necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new Work. B. Beginning of restoration Work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work. Replace and restore at completion.

01737- 2

B. Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work.

C. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces. D. Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new

work and finishes.

E. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent condensation in exposed areas.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to accommodate Owner occupancy.

B. Project Finishes: Complete in all respects including operational mechanical and

electrical work.

C. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring Products and finishes to specified condition.

D. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified

condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.

E. In addition to specified replacement of equipment and fixtures restore existing plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and electrical systems to full operational condition.

F. Install Products as specified in individual Sections.

3.04 TRANSITIONS

A. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance.

B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not

possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect.

3.05 ADJUSTMENTS

A. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

B. Where a change of plane of ¼ inch or more occurs, submit to Architect a

recommendation for providing a smooth transition. C. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required.

01737- 3

D. Fit work at penetrations of surfaces as specified in Division 1 Section “Cutting and

Patching”. 3.06 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES

A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections.

B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish.

3.07 FINISHES

A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections. B. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish

cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. 3.08 CLEANING

A. In addition to cleaning specified in Division 1 Sections, clean Owner occupied areas affected by Work of this Project.

END OF SECTION

02315 - 1

SECTION 02315 EXCAVATION AND FILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Excavating and filling for building foundations, paving, roads, parking areas,

slabs-on-grade, site structures, utility trenches and filling for landscaping.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02230 – Site Clearing. 2. Section 02512 – Site Water Distribution. 3. Section 02538 – Sanitary Sewer System. 4. Section 02630 – Storm Drainage. 5. Section 02721 – Aggregate Base Course. 6. Section 02923 – Landscape Grading. 7. Geotechnical report; bore hole locations and findings of subsurface materials.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics

of Soil Using Modified Effort. 2. ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-

Cone Method. 3. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 4. ASTM D3017 – Standard test method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

B. Local utility standards when working within 24 inches of utility lines.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. For information, submit description of vibratory compactors proposed for use when requesting placement of backfill and fill materials greater than requirement established herein.

C. Materials for use as "imported fill material", and "pipe bedding and backfill material".

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation and backfill work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction and the recommendations of the geotechnical report.

02315 - 2

B. Soil Testing Service: 1. The OWNER will engage a soil testing service, to include testing soil materials

proposed for use in the work and for quality control testing during excavation and fill operations.

2. Samples of materials shall be furnished to the testing service by the CONTRACTOR.

3. Under this Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall smooth out areas for density tests and otherwise facilitate testing work as directed.

C. Geotechnical Engineer: 1. The OWNER will engage a Geotechnical Engineer to review and approve

subgrade preparation, excavations and backfill placement prior to construction of pavement sections, building footings and other site improvements.

2. Under this contract, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate their work with the Geotechnical Engineer and the local jurisdiction having authority.

D. Furnish imported soil and aggregate material from single source through out the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS:

2.01 MATERIALS

A. OSSC refers to the State of Oregon/ APWA, Standard Specifications for Construction.

B. Topsoil: Provide topsoil to accomplish the Work. Refer to Geotechnical Report or landscape specifications for topsoil characteristics.

C. Stripping: Grass, sod and other types of vegetation removed.

D. On-Site Structural Fill: Any on-site soil materials free of organic matter, non-plastic (dried), containing no particles larger than 6 inches, capable of compaction as specified, and approved by the soil testing service. Use for trench zone and trench foundation stabilization material in all areas not receiving improvements. Material shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and Governing Authorities having jurisdiction prior to use in the Work.

E. Imported Fine-Grained Structural Fill Material: Material approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and Governing Authorities having jurisdiction for use as embankment material from an off-site source other than imported granular material. The source shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and Governing Authorities having jurisdiction prior to use.

F. Imported Granular Material: Free-draining (clean) granular fill (sand & gravel), capable of compaction as specified, with not more than 5% fines passing the #200 sieve (washed analysis).

G. Pipe Bedding and Backfill Material: Crushed rock with a maximum particle size of 3/4" for pipe zone and 1 1/2"-0” well-graded capable of compaction meeting OSSC as specified, with not more than 5% passing the #200 sieve (washed analysis) in trench

02315 - 3

zone. Material shall be approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and Governing Authorities having jurisdiction prior to use in the Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Site information: Subsurface soil conditions were investigated and shown in the Geotechnical report. A copy of the report is available from the owner. 1. The data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations

or warranties or accuracy or continuity of such conditions between soil borings. It is expressly understood the OWNER will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn there from by the CONTRACTOR. The data is made available for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR.

2. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the OWNER.

B. Disposal of Waste Material: 1. Disposal sites for earth waste materials are not available on OWNER’S property.

Materials that are not suitable for use as topsoil or cannot be used in embankments or construction shall be disposed off-site.

2. CONTRACTOR shall restrict temporary storage of waste materials and materials to be reused to the designated work areas.

3. CONTRACTOR shall arrange and pay for removal and disposal of all waste materials encountered in the work.

C. Existing Utilities: 1. Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work. If utilities are to remain

in place, provide adequate means of protection during excavation operations. 2. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered

during excavation, consult utility OWNER immediately for directions. Cooperate with the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE and public and private utility companies in keeping their respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the utility OWNER.

3. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the OWNER or others, except when permitted in writing by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

4. Demolish and completely remove from the site existing underground utilities which are not to remain in service and are located within an excavation area. Coordinate with local utility companies for shut-off services in lines that are active.

D. Barricade open excavations in compliance with code requirements. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavement, and other facilities immediately adjacent to excavations, from damages caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards.

02315 - 4

E. Protection of Subgrade: Do not allow equipment to disturb subgrade, stripped areas, or other area prepared for project. Prevent water from collecting and ponding on surface. Repair disturbed subgrade as specified below for unauthorized excavation.

F. Excavation Safety: The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for making all excavations in a safe manner. Provide appropriate measures to retain excavation side slopes and prevent rock falls to ensure that persons working in or near the excavation are protected. CONTRACTOR shall follow OHSA standards.

G. Protection: 1. Protect trees and other features remaining as a portion of the final landscaping. 2. Protect bench marks, utilities, sidewalks, paving and curbs from equipment,

vehicular traffic and general construction activities. 3. Protect above and below grade utilities which are to remain. 4. Notify OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE of unexpected subsurface conditions and

discontinue affected work in the area until notified to resume operations.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of all material encountered when establishing required grade elevations. All excavation is unclassified. The contours indicated on the drawings indicate finish grade unless otherwise indicated.

B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, shall be at no change in Contract amount.

C. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade or trench invert elevations, notify the Geotechnical Engineer who will observe conditions. 1. Proof roll ground surface. Proof rolling will be observed by the Geotechnical

Engineer. Remove soft areas detected by the proof rolling and replace with compacted structural fill material as directed.

2. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace the excavated material as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

D. Stability of Excavations: The stability of excavation slopes will be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

E. Shoring and Bracing: Provide shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross braces, in good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of the time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as the excavation progresses.

F. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding the project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent

detrimental soil changes to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines and other

02315 - 5

dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

2. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collection or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations or public utility lines as temporary drainage facilities.

G. Excavation for Building Pads: 1. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus

0.10', and extend a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete form work, installation of services, other construction and for inspection (5 feet minimum).

2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is to be placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete.

H. Excavation for Pavements: Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and grades as shown.

I. Excavations for Trenches: Performed as part of work installed. 1. Dig trenches to the uniform width required for the particular item to be installed,

sufficient minimum width as shown on the Drawings and to provide ample working room.

2. Excavate trenches to the depth indicated or required. Carry the depth of trenches for piping to establish the indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond the building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below grade to avoid freeze-up and outside of the 1:1 slope beyond the bottom of the footings.

3. When unstable pipe foundation is encountered, place a minimum of 12 inches of imported granular fill material under the pipe bedding material to stabilize the trench or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

4. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for the entire body of the pipe.

5. Backfill trenches prior to tests and inspections. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.

J. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F.

K. Dust: Assume full responsibility for all alleviation or prevention of dust nuisance on or about the site in compliance with regulatory requirements.

3.03 COMPACTION

A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area.

B. Prior to fill placement or aggregate base course placement, the subgrade shall be proof-rolled with a fully-loaded dump truck. Any areas that pump, heave or appear soft shall be over excavated and backfilled a minimum of 12 inches as well as placing a

02315 - 6

geotextile fabric such as Mirafi 600nx with imported fill material or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

C. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557. 1. Structural Fill: Compact exposed subgrade where disturbed, and each layer of

backfill or fill material to 92 percent of maximum dry density (MDD). 2. Non-Structural Landscape Fill: Compact each layer of fill material to 90 percent

of MDD. 3. Asphalt Pavement, Pedestrian Paths and Sidewalks: Compact each layer of fill

material to 92 percent of MDD. 4. Trench Backfill: Pipe base and pipe zone compacted to 92% of MDD. In

pavement areas compact top 12 inches of subgrade, and each layer of backfill or fill material to 92 percent of MDD. Contractor shall take precautions so as to not over compact the pipe zone causing damage to the utility pipe.

D. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material. Prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.

1. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material too wet to permit compaction to specified density.

2. Soil material removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to satisfactory value.

3.04 BACKFILL AND FILL

A. In all excavations, unless otherwise specified, use satisfactory excavated or imported material for backfill which has been sampled and tested by a soil testing service employed by the OWNER as specified in Section 01400. On-site materials may be used in structural fills only during dry conditions when optimum moisture content can be maintained.

B. Use imported fill material in wet conditions as structural fill, when onsite soils can not be utilized.

C. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE of construction below finish grade

including, where applicable, waterproofing, damp proofing, drainage pipe and perimeter insulation.

2. Inspection, testing, approval and recording of locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing and backfilling of voids with satisfactory

materials. 4. Removal of trash and debris.

D. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not

02315 - 7

more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers or as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide the

optimum moisture content. 2. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative

dry density for each area classification. 3. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces muddy, frozen, or containing frost

or ice. 4. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required

elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying the material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift.

3.05 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas of work including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades.

B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes. Grading CONTRACTOR to provide for placement of top soil, as required, to the finish grades indicated on the drawings.

C. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs and Pavement: Grading smooth and even, free from voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2-inch when tested with a 10-foot straight edge.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: The CONTRACTOR is responsible for preparing and scheduling all required testing activities.

B. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow Geotechnical Engineer and soil testing service retained by the OWNER to observe, test and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed.

C. If in the opinion of the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, based on Geotechnical Engineer and soil testing service reports and observations of subgrades and fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide corrective work as required to reach specified density at no additional expense.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances.

02315 - 8

C. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, compact to required density and provide other corrective work as specified, prior to further construction.

D. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.

E. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.

F. Protect structures, utilities and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth operations.

G. Do not leave more than 100 feet of trench excavation open for more than 24 hours. Protect public and plating or other approved methods.

H. Protect flexible pipes from damage during backfilling. Do not over compact trench backfill immediately above pipe zone.

END OF SECTION

02721 - 1

SECTION 02721 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Aggregate base course.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02315 – Excavation and Fill. 2. Section 02740 – Flexible Pavement. 3. Section 02750 – Rigid Pavement. 4. Section 02923 – Landscape Grading.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics

of Soil Using Modified Effort. 2. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 3. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: Submit, in air-tight containers, 10 lb sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory.

C. Materials Source: Submit name of imported materials suppliers.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Furnish each aggregate material from single source throughout the Work.

B. Perform Work in accordance with all Federal, State and Local standards.

C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

02721 - 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. " WAC 51-50 " refers to the most recent edition of the State of Washington building code, Standard Specifications for Construction, for the various gradations indicated on the drawings.

B. Minimum requirements for rock: per WAC 51-50. Rock for aggregate base course shall meet the State qualifications and meet the graduation designations indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify subgrade has been inspected and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer and that gradients and elevations are correct, and is dry.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Correct irregularities in subgrade gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re-compacting.

B. Do not place fill on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces.

3.03 AGGREGATE PLACEMENT

A. Spread aggregate over prepared subgrade to the total compacted thickness indicated on the Drawings.

B. Place aggregate in maximum 6 inch layers and compact as specified in Section 02315.

C. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated. If thickness is more than 6 inches, spread in two lifts.

D. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction.

E. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce moisture content.

F. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to roller compaction equipment.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

02721 - 3

B. Maximum Variation From Flat Surface: 1/2 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

3.05 STOCK PILING

A. Stockpile materials on site at locations designated by OWNER REPRESENTATIVE.

B. Stockpile in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedule and requirements.

C. Separate different aggregate materials with dividers or stockpile individually to prevent mixing.

D. Direct surface water away from stockpile site to prevent erosion or deterioration of materials.

3.06 STOCKPILE CLEANUP

A. Remove stockpile, leave area in clean and neat condition. Grade site surface to prevent free standing of surface water.


A. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D698, ASTM D2922 and ASTM D3017.

B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.

C. Frequency of Tests: One test every 500 SY.

END OF SECTION

02740 - 1

SECTION 02740 FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Asphaltic concrete paving, wearing, binder and base course. 2. Surface sealer. 3. Aggregate subbase course.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02315 – Excavation and Fill. 2. Section 02721 – Aggregate Base Course.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Asphalt Institute: 1. AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot- Mix Types. 2. TAI – (The Asphalt Institute) – MS-3 Asphalt Plant Manual 3. TAI – (The Asphalt Institute) – MS-8 Asphalt Paving Manual 4. AI MS-19 - Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual. 5. ODOT and APWA – Oregon Standard Specifications for construction 2002

(OSSC)

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for

Use in Pavement Construction. 2. ASTM D2041- Standard test method for theoretical maximum specific gravity and

density of Biumious paving mixtures. 3. ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for

Use in Pavement Construction.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Paving: Level 2-1/2” dense HMAC per WAC 51-50.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit product information and mix design.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Perform Work in accordance with WAC 51-50 Specifications.

B. Obtain materials from same source throughout.

02740 - 2

C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.

C. Place bitumen mixture when temperature is not more than 15 degrees F below temperature at when initially mixed and not more than maximum specified temperature.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Cement: PG-64-22 per OSSC 00744.

B. Aggregate Quality: WAC 51-50 Specifications

C. Aggregate for Asphalt Level 21/2’ Dense in accordance with WAC 51-50 Specifications

D. Course Aggregate: WAC 51-50 Specifications

E. Fine Aggregate: WAC 51-50 Specifications

F. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated line or other mineral dust, free of foreign matter.

G. Tack Coat: Use CSS-1 or CSS-1H.

2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MIX

A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.

B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning of Work.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


02740 - 3

B. Verify compacted aggregate base is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

C. Prior to pavement placement, the aggregate base shall be proof-rolled with a fully-loaded dump truck. Any areas that pump, heave or appear soft shall be over excavated and backfilled a minimum of 12 inches as well as placing a geotextile fabric such as Mirafi 600nx with imported fill material or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

D. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

E. Verify gutter drainage grilles and frames, manhole frames and lids are installed in correct position and elevation.

3.02 SUBBASE

A. Aggregate Subbase: Install as specified in Section 02721.

3.03 PREPARATION - TACK COAT

A. Apply tack coat on asphalt or concrete surfaces at uniform rate of 0.05-0.15 gal/sq.yd.

B. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of curbs.

C. Coat surfaces of manhole, catch basin, and cleanout frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces.

3.04 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE

A. Install Work in accordance with WAC 51-50 requirements for Level 2 pavements.

B. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.

C. Place to thickness as shown on the typical sections.

D. Install manhole, and clean-out frames in correct position and elevation.

E. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

F. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.

G. Compact pavement by rolling to not less than 90% of the rice maximum density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

H. Maximum thickness of single course shall be 3 inches.

3.05 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE

A. Place asphalt base course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.

02740 - 4

B. Place to thickness as shown on the typical sections.

C. Place wearing course within 24 hours of placing and compacting binder course. When binder course is placed more than 24 hours before placing wearing course, clean surface and apply tack coat before placing wearing course.

D. Place to thickness as shown on the typical sections.

E. Install manhole and clean-out frames in correct position and elevation.

F. Compact each course by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

G. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.

H. Compact pavement by rolling to not less than 90% of the maximum rice density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

3.06 TOLERANCES


B. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

C. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.

D. Variation from Indicated Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.


A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Test compaction and composition per WAC 51-50 Specifications. Minimum one set of compaction tests per 500 ton of asphalt and one composition test per 2000 square yards of material placed.

C. Record asphalt temperature during placement.

3.08 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting finished work.

B. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from damage for until surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F. Permission from the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE is required to allow construction traffic on finished asphaltic pavements.

END OF SECTION

Site Concrete 02750 - 1

SECTION 02750

SITE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete sidewalks. 2. Concrete integral curbs and gutters.


A. Section 02200 – Earthwork: Preparation of site for paving and base.

B. Section 02721 - Aggregate Base Course.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 214 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Tests results; of

Concrete 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 304 - (American Concrete Institute) - Recommended Practice for Measuring,

Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 4. ACI 305 Recommended Practices for Cold Weather Concreting 5. ACI 306 Recommended Practices for Hot Weather Concreting 6. ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete 7. ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork 8. NRMCA National Ready Mix Concrete Association, latest revision: Certificate of

Conformance for Concrete Production Facilities.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for

Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A497 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed,

for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel

Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 5. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 8. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds

for Curing Concrete. 9. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for

Concrete. 10. ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming

Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete. 11. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).


12. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01300 – Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Provide samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials' certifications as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers and sealers.

C. Furnish certified reports of each proposed mix for each type of concrete at least thirty days prior to start of installation of the work of this section.

D. CONTRACTOR to provide scoring plan for review and approval by OWNER’s REPRESENTATIVE at least 14 working days prior to starting work.

E. Mock-Up: Provide a minimum 5-foot square sample plane, showing specified finishes and joints.

F. Maintain approved sample on-site in a secure location for the duration of the Project. Sample may remain as part of completed work.

G. Product Data: Submit data on joint filler and curing compounds.


A. Section 01400 – Quality Requirements: Testing and inspecting services.

B. All Work in the public rights of way or easements dedicated to the public shall be

in accordance with the local Governing Authority having Jurisdiction.

C. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.

D. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum 3 years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience.

1.07 TOLERANCES


B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.

C. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/4 inch.

D. Maximum variation from elevation: 1/8 inch.



A. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.

B. Contractor & Suppliers shall rinse all concrete residue from trucks, tools, etc. into excavated earthen pits or eco-pans as shown on the drawings. No wash water shall be allowed to discharge into storm drainage facilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Forms: Steel, wood or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects, conforming to ACI 301. 1. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as

required. 2. Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or

deface surface of concrete.

B. Reinforcing Materials: 1. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 2. Fabricated Bar Mats: Welded or clip-assembled steel bar or rod mats, ASTM A

184. Use ASTM A 615, Grade 60 steel bars, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to

length with ends square and free of burrs. Provide slip pin dowels as a product commercially manufactured for this use.

4. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.

5. Provide reinforcing as indicated on the drawings.

C. Concrete Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type IA or IIA.

a. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618; Type F. 3. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33.

a. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1½ inches b. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause

spalling. 4. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. 5. Air Entrainment: ASTM C 260. 6. Chemical Admixture: ASTM C 494.

D. Expansion Joint Materials: 1. ASTM D 994, ASTM D 1751 and D 1752 preformed asphalt impregnated, 1/2-

inch thick.

E. Joint Sealer Material:


1. A polymer, designed for gun application, containing no free Toluene Diisocyanate (TDI), complying with ASTM C 920 , Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. Scofield LITHOSEAL Trafficalk-3G,color grey, or approved equal.

F. Liquid-Membrane Forming and Sealing Curing Compound: 1. Comply with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. Moisture loss no more than 0.055 gr./sq.cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.

G. Bonding Compound: 1. Acrylic or styrene batadiene base, re-wetable type.

H. Epoxy Adhesive: 1. ASTM C 881, 2-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces.

Provide material "Type", "Grade" and "Class" to suit project requirements.

I. Detectable Warning Texture: Provided as shown on Plans. 1. Texture: Diamond texture or Truncated dome style where shown on drawings. 2. Pattern: Diamond or Domes to be arranged in an in-line pattern only. 3. Application: Cast in Place, or approved equal. 4. Color: As shown on the drawings.

2.02 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN AND TESTING

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 1. Do not use the Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent

testing agency. 2. Limit use of fly ash to 25 percent of cement content by weight.

B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28-Day):

a. Concrete pavement: 4000 psi b. Concrete sidewalks: 3000 psi

2. Slump Limit at Point of Placement: 2-4 inches. 3. Air Content: 5 percent +/- 1%.

C. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results or other circumstances warrant.

D. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94. 1. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce

mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

E. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and Inspection Services: Provide concrete mix design and source to Engineer.


F. Tests on mixes will be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.

G. Test samples in accordance with ACI 301.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION AND EXAMINATION

A. Section 01039 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase immediately before placing concrete.

C. Verify compacted granular base is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

D. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.

E. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.

B. Coat surfaces of manholes, catch basin and clean out frames with oil to prevent bonding with concrete pavement.

C. Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

3.03 FORM CONSTRUCTION

A. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

B. Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Concrete flatwork thickness is noted on plans and details. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.

C. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of forms not more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4-inch in 10 feet.

D. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage.

E. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete placement.


3.04 REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Place reinforcement as indicated in the drawings.

C. Interrupt reinforcement at contraction/expansion joints.

D. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.

E. Provide doweled joints 24 inch on center at construction joints and expansion joints with one end of dowel set in capped sleeve to allow longitudinal movement.

3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with requirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

C. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels and joint devices.

D. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 2 hour, place a construction joint.

F. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to form a smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

G. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement.

H. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.

I. When placing concrete with welded wire mesh reinforcing, place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off and screed.


1. Remove and replace portions of bottom layer of concrete that have been placed more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer or use bonding agent if acceptable to OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.

J. Place concrete to pattern indicated.

K. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength.

L. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F

uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F and not more than 80 degrees F at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents

or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix design.

M. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot weather conditions exist. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of

placement to below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.06 JOINTS

A. General: Construct isolation, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true to line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

B. When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened-plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on Drawings or at approximate 15’ intervals if not shown. Construct weakened-plane for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top

portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. 2. Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut

1/4 into depth of slab.

D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for more than 2 hours, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints.


1. Construction joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard metal keyway-section forms.

2. Where load transfer-slip dowel devices are used, install so that one end of each dowel bar is free to move.

E. Isolation Joints: Provide pre-formed asphalt impregnated joint material. 1. Locate expansion joints abutting catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures,

foundations, footings, curbs, gutter, sidewalk joints and other fixed objects, unless otherwise indicated, and as shown on Drawings. Locate at 45’ intervals if not included on drawings.

F. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1-inch or more than 2-inches below finished surface for placement of backer rod and joint sealer. Place joint filler between paving components and building or other appurtenances. Recess top of filler as shown in drawings for sealant placement.

G. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler.

H. Place joint filler in pavement sequence pattern placement. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

I. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within 1/4 inch of finished surface.

J. Finish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.

K. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

L. Fillers and Sealants: Apply joint sealant to all joints in pedestrian or vehicular traffic areas, in accordance with the Scofield Tech-Data Bulletin S-404-3G, or equal if a different sealer is approved for use.

M. Provide keyed joints as indicated.

3.07 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture.

B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, or abrupt angles and re-float repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish, true to within 1/8-inch in 10 feet.

C. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete troweling and finish surface as shown on the drawings or if not shown as follows: 1. Broom finish: Broom finish by drawing a light hair broom across concrete surface

perpendicular to line of traffic or to match existing direction of texture. Repeat operation if required to provide a texture acceptable to OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE


D. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed, except where required for finishing. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.

E. Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing.

F. Place detectable warning texture per manufacture’s recommendations or as shown on drawings.

3.08 CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these.

E. Curing/Sealer Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation according to manufacturer’s instructions.

3.09 JOINT SEALING

A. Separate pavement from vertical surfaces with ¼ inch thick joint filler.

B. Place joint filler in pavement pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

C. Extend joint filler from bottom of pavement to within ¼ inch of finished surface.

3.010 TOLERANCES

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: ¼ inch in 10 ft.

C. Maximum Variation From True Position: ¼ inch.

3.011 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.


C. Drill test cores where directed by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement with Portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive.

D. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over sidewalks for 7 days and vehicular traffic over pavement until 85 percent design strength of concrete has been achieved. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible first by covering concrete and by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

E. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just before final inspection.


A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services.

B. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 100 or less cubic yards of each class of concrete placed each day or as directed by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.

C. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and cured on site under same conditions as concrete it represents.

D. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken in accordance with ACI 301.

E. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken.

END OF SECTION

02810 - 1

SECTION 02810 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work in the section includes providing the required equipment, material, labor and expertise to provide a fully operational automatic irrigation system: 1. Sprinkler heads and accessories. 2. Control system. 3. Submittals 4. Inspections 5. Testing 6. Trenching. 7. Valves. 8. Pipe and fittings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02930 – Trees, Shrubs and Groundcover 2. Section 02923 - Landscape Grading, Topsoil and Soil Preparation. 3. Section 02924 - Seeding

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-

Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 2. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-

Rated Pipe (SDR Series). 3. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electric solenoid valves, solid state controller, underground irrigation system, with low point self drain, air pressure water evacuation capabilities.

B. 100% coverage in lawn areas, minimum 80% coverage in shrub areas.

C. Source Power: 120volt.

D. Low Voltage Controls: 24 volt.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

02810 - 2


B. Construction Work Schedule: Submit a work schedule indicating type of work to be done, dates for that proposed work and dates of completion.

C. Samples: Submit one outlet of each type, with housing. Accepted samples may not be used in the Work.

1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed components: isolation valves, automatic valves, manual drain valves, backflow prevention, and mainline piping system. Each irrigation appurtenance to be dimensioned from (3) three stationary points.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit instructions for operation and maintenance of system and controls,

seasonal activation and shutdown, and manufacturer's parts catalog. 2. Submit Irrigation Schedule indicating length of time each valve is required to be

open to deliver determined amount of water.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum 10 years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience in successful projects of similar size and complexity.

1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.

B. Convene one (1) meeting two (2) weeks prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on the drawings.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B. Coordinate the Work with site backfilling, landscape grading and delivery of plant life.

1.010 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.

B. Furnish the following at Final Closeout:

02810 - 3

1. Two sprinkler heads of each type and size. 2. Two valve keys for manual valves. 3. Two valve box keys. 4. Two sets of quick coupling accessories as described in Part 2 Products. 5. Two wrenches for each type head core and for removing and installing each type

head.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE MATERIALS

A. Plastic pipe for main line will be PVC (polyvinyl chloride) Class 200, SDR 21, bell end, continuously bearing the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation and complying with the requirements of ASTM D -1784, D-2241.

B. Plastic pipe for lateral lines will be PVC (polyvinyl chloride) Class 200, SDR 21, bell end, continuously bearing the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation and complying with the requirements of ASTM D -1784, D-2241.

C. In all pipe installations, the manufacture’s printed seal will be visible.

D. Plastic pipe for sleeves under paved areas, will be PVC (polyvinyl chloride) Schedule 40, bell end, continuously bearing the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation and complying with the requirements of ASTM, D -1785.

E. Plastic nipples will be PVC (polyvinyl chloride) Schedule 80, N.S.F. approved pipe, TBE and TOE, complying with the requirements of ASTM D-1785.

2.02 IRRIGATION HEADS

A. Spray heads will be Rain Bird 1800 PRS series. 1804-PRS heads will be installed in lawn areas. 1806-PRS heads will be installed in shrub beds.

B Spray heads will be installed with Marlex elbows, Rain Bird SP-100 pipe and spiral barb elbows. Pipe length shall not exceed 12". Pipe shall be flexible black tubing of low-density polyethylene material. (See detail)

C All heads in shrub beds will be installed 2" above grade to accommodate the application of bark mulch.

D All heads in turf areas will be installed to grade per manufacture’s specifications.

2.03 MANUAL VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Watts. 2. Wilkins. 3. Nibco. 4. City approved manufacturer.

02810 - 4

5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements

B. Ball Valves: plastic construction, line size.

C. Backflow Prevention:, double check valve type, bronze body construction, test cocks in city approved location. Febco 805Y or approved equal.

D. Manual Valve Box and Cover: 6 inch Economy model, round, black lid as available from Armor Access Boxes (formally Amtek)

E. Drain Valve: plastic construction, ¾ inch.

F. Quick Coupler: Rainbird 33 DLRC, brass, 2-piece body, locking cover, to include (2) Rainbird 33DK model valve keys and Rainbird SH-0 hose swivels.

2.04 CONTROLS AND CONTROL VALVES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Rain Bird Sprinkler Manufacturing Corp; Model PEB series. 2. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements 3. VIT Products Strong Box 4. Armor Access Boxes

B. Controller: Automatic controller, microprocessor solid state control with visible readout display, surge protection, (2) master valve terminals, with automatic start and shutdown, temporary override feature to bypass cycle for inclement weather, timer stations quantity as shown on the drawings, cycle-soak capabilities and 365 day programming calendar.

C. Controller Housing: NEMA 250 Type 3R ; weatherproof, watertight, with lockable access door, Strong Box model SB-16SSW enclosure with Strong Box model PED-16SSW base as available from VIT Products 425-218-0560.

D. Valve boxes: 16 inch by 10 inch model Standard, black locking lid as available form Armor Access Boxes.

E. Valves: Electric Solenoid including required fittings and accessories.

F. Wire Conductors: water proof, Color coded

G. Wire: insulated, solid copper, 12 GA. 3 colors

H. Rain Sensor Shut Off: wireless rain sensor and receiver, model WRSC as available from Rainbird.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


02810 - 5

B. Verify location of existing utilities.

C. Verify plan dimensions with actual site conditions. Inform Landscape Architect of any discrepancies immediately. Verify required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Route piping to avoid plants, ground cover, and structures.

B. Layout and stake locations of system components: all spray heads, valve boxes, mainline, backflow preventer and controller.

C. Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under paving to accommodate system with appropriate trade.

3.03 INSPECTIONS

A. Inspections will be attended by the General Contractor and OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE.

B. Inspections to include: 1. System Layout inspection: heads, valves boxes, quick couplers, mainline and

laterals shall be located with irrigation type flags for review and approval. 2. Trenching inspection: Upon completion of the trenching and prior to placing pipe,

the trenching depth, vertical sides of trench and configuration will be inspected. 3. Pressure Test inspection: See Part 3.7.B 4. Head Coverage inspection: Prior to planting and the irrigation system is fully

operational, including automatic controller. Manual operation of valves will not be accepted for this inspection.

5. Punch List Preparation Inspection at Substantial Completion: planting completed. 6. Final Inspection: to verify Punch List items have been addressed.

3.04 TRENCHING

A. Trench in accordance with Section 02324.

B. Trench depth and width: 1. Minimum Width: 10 inches. 2. Minimum Cover Over Installed Mainline under vehicular paving: 24 inches. 3. Minimum Cover Over Installed Mainline: 18 inches. 4. Minimum Cover Over Installed Laterals: 12 inches.

C. Trench to accommodate grade changes and slope to drains.

D. Maintain trenches free of debris, material, or obstructions damaging to pipe.

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. Connect to utilities.

02810 - 6

B. Set irrigation heads and valve box covers at finish grade elevations.

C. Locate sprinkler heads nine (9) inches from building foundation walls unless otherwise noted.

D. Slope piping for self drainage to gravel filled drainage pit.

E. Use threaded nipples for risers to each spray head.

F. Install control wiring in accordance with manufactures recommendations. Provide 6 foot expansion coil at each control valve, and at 100 ft intervals. Place wire beside mainline and / or lateral pipe.

G. After piping is installed, but before heads are installed and backfilling commences, open valves and flush system with full head of water.

H. Cap and complete pressure testing of mainline, before installing heads, cap laterals and complete lateral testing.

I. Coordinate pipe installation and conduit installation with all impacted trades at Pre Construction meeting.

3.06 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill with site soil with clumps or aggregates no larger than ½ inch in size.

B. Back fill trenching in a minimum (2) two lifts, use water to aide in compaction minimizing trench failure. CONTRACTOR to repair all trench failures during warrantee period.

C. Protect piping from displacement.


A. Prior to backfilling, test mainline and laterals for leakage, system to maintain 125 psi pressure for one hour.

B. System is acceptable when no leakage or loss of pressure occurs during test period.

C. Provide one complete Spring season start-up and Fall season shutdown.

3.08 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Water window from 10 PM to 6 AM. Adjust control system to achieve required irrigation cycles required to provide adequate water placement for all seasons within this water window.

C. At completion of the planting operation, change head types if necessary or adjust heads for full water coverage as directed by OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE, Architect/Engineer.

02810 - 7

3.09 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for demonstration and training.

B. At the scheduled Final Inspection, with the OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE in attendance, the irrigation contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the entire irrigation system: all automatic controls, activate each valve, operate an isolation valve, operate a quick coupler valve and demonstrate a Winterization dewatering procedure.

C. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system, including adjusting of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for demonstration.

END OF SECTION

02831 - 1

SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES


A. Section Includes: 1. Gate framework, fabric, and accessories. 2. Excavation for post bases and concrete foundations for posts. 3. Decorative slatting

B. Related Work:

1. Section 02832 – CHAIN LINK SLIDING GATES 2. Section 03300 - CONCRETE.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM F567 - Installation of Chain-Link Fence.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A392 - Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric. 2. ASTM F1083 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized)

Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. 3. ASTM 569 - Pipe Strength.

C. Federal Specifications (FS):

1. FS RR-F-191 - Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (and Gates, Chain Link Fence Fabric, and Accessories).


A. Fence Height: 8 feet nominal as indicated on Drawings. Supplier to provide structural calculations for all fencing and gates.

B. Line Post Spacing: At intervals not exceeding 10 feet. C. This is a Contractor designed item. The GC is to provide complete engineering for all

fencing items, including footings, posts, supports, etc. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, WA engineering stamp, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components.

02831 - 2

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts relative to property lines.


A. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Chain Link Fence and Gate Manufacturers: 1. Pacific Fence and Wire Co. 2. Columbia Fence Co.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.02 LINE POSTS

A. Space 10' o.c. maximum unless indicated otherwise, of the following minimum sizes and:

B. C Section roll formed steel per ASTM-A-570, Grade 45, Size: 1.875" x 1.625".

Minimum bending strength of 247 pounds under a 10' cantilever load.

C. Coat with 1.2 ounces of zinc-coating.

D. At the contractor's option a 2.375" OD galvanized pipe conforming to ASTM F1083 or ASTM 569 with minimum bending strength of 201 pounds under 10' cantilevered load coated with 2.0 ounces of hot dipped zinc.

2.03 TOP AND BRACE RAIL

A. Manufacturer's longest lengths with expansion type couplings, approximately 6" long, for each joint. Provide means for attaching top rail securely to each gate corner, pull and end post.

B. Roll formed section of 1-5/8" x 1-1/4" channel shaped rail with minimum vertical

bending strength of 237 pounds on 10' span continuous coated with 1.2 ounces of zinc aluminum alloy per ASTM A 569.

02831 - 3

C. At the contractor's option a 1.66" OD standard weight galvanized pipe with minimum

vertical bending strength of 202 pounds on 10' span coated with 1.2 ounces of hot dipped zinc may be utilized.

D. Top rail with coupling 6" minimum in length at maximum 21'-0" continuous centers.

2.04 TERMINAL POSTS

A. Post Tops: Weathertight closure cap (for tubular posts), one cap for each post, furnish caps with openings to permit passage of top rail.

B. End corner and all pull posts shall be roll formed sections 3.5" x 3.5" with minimum

bending strength of 486 pounds on 10' cantilever load.

C. Coating 1.2 ounces of hot dipped zinc.

D. At the Contractor's option a 2-7/8" OD galvanized pipe conforming with ASTM F1083 or ASTM 569 with minimum bending strength of 381 pounds on a 10' cantilever, with 1.2 ounces of hot dipped zinc.

2.05 CHAIN-LINK FABRIC A. One piece of fabric in widths as indicated with black polyethylene slats

B. 2 inch mesh No. 9 gauge with one salvage edge knuckled at one end and twisted and barbed at the other.

C. Coating: 1.2 ounces hot dipped, galvanized, after fabrication zinc coating conforming

to ASTM A 392 Class One. 2.06 SLIDING GATES – SEE SECTION 02832 2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings: Pressed steel or malleable iron hot dipped galvanized.

B. Tie Wires: 9 gauge aluminum or gauge galvanized steel minimum. Spacing at 24" maximum centers.

C. Manufacturer's longest lengths with expansion type couplings, approximately 6" long,

for each joint. Provide means for attaching top rail securely to each gate corner, pull and end post.

D. Slats: Provide .030" Polyethylene slats at all gate areas and at all existing perimeter

fencing. P.D.S. a division of A & B or equal. Color: Black.

02831 - 4

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install framework, fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Set gate posts plumb, in concrete footings with top of footing 2 inches above below

finish grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff. C. Brace gates for stability and adjust wheels as required.

D. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail

and diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail, one bay from end and gate posts. E. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6 inch long rail sleeves.

F. Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 100 feet maximum, whichever is

less.

G. Position bottom of fabric 2 inches above finished grade.

H. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 15 inches on centers.

I. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips.

J. Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts.

K. Install gate with fabric to match fence. Install three hinges per leaf, latch, catches, foot

bolts and sockets, retainer and locking clamp.

L. Provide center drop and drop rod retainers at center of double gate openings. 3.02 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch.

B. Maximum Offset From True Position: one inch.

C. Components shall not infringe on adjacent property lines.

END OF SECTION

02832 - 1

SECTION 02832

CHAIN LINK CANTILEVER SLIDE GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Internal roller aluminum cantilever slide gates. B. Related Work

1. Sectoin 02831 – CHAIN LINK FENCING 2. Section 03300 - CONCRETE

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Changes in specifications may not be made after the published date of bid. All submittals of substitutions must be approved before bid date.

B. Shop drawings of fences and gates with all dimensions, details, and finishes. Drawings must

include post foundations. This is a Contractor designed item. The GC is to provide complete engineering for all fencing items, including footings, posts, supports, etc.

C. Product data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts indicating materials and that all conditions of the

specifications have been met. 1.03 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide a limited warranty against failure for the gate, rollers and other parts for a period of 7 years. Failure being any manufacturing defect that prohibits normal operation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Products from other qualified manufacturers who have five years or more experience manufacturing internal roller aluminum cantilever slide gates will be considered by the architect as equal if approved in writing 10 days prior to bidding, and they meet all specifications for design, size, gauge of metal parts and fabrication.

B. Chain link fences, gates, and operators must be obtained from a single source.

2.02 INTERNAL ROLLER ALUMINUM CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE

A. Gate Frame: Made in accordance with ASTM F 1184 Type II Class 2, and in compliance with UL-325, and ASTM 2200. (No substitution) Gate to be made of Aluminum Alloy 6005A-T61. All

02832 - 2

square members are 2" sq. weighing 0.94 lb/FT (139 kg/m). Complete frame welded to top (HI-STRENGTH) one piece track and top frame member and 4" x 2" bottom rail weighing 1.71 lbs./ft (2.54 kg/m) Supply 2 truck assemblies that are swivel type having lubricated and scaled ball bearing wheels that will align in the track during all normal operations of the gate.

Standard Opening Standard Support Overhang

10'0" (3048 mm) 6'6" (1981 mm) 11'0" (3354 mm) through 14'0" (4267mm) 7'6" (2286 mm) 15'0" (4572 mm) through 22'0" (6706 mm) 10'0" (3048 mm) 23'0" (7010 mm) through 30'0" (9144 mm) 12'0" (3657 mm) 31'0" (9449 mm) through 40'0" (12192 mm) 16'0" (4876 mm)

B. Gate Finish (Frame): Natural Aluminum to match fencing

C. Chain Link Filler : Galvanized After Weaving

Chain link fabric filler installed using hook bolts that are inserted through pre-drilled holes in the

frame. To these hook bolts the fabric will be attached by means of a tension bar which is laced through the last link of the fabric. The hook bolts are 15" (381mm) on center and all four sides of the gate. (No substitution) This assures a drum like tightness to the fabric. This fabric will give additional strength to the gate.

D. Diagonal adjustable 1/4" (6 mm) stainless steel truss cables (2) provided inside each panel of

the gate. (One each direction).

E. "Secure Trac" is an enclosed (HI-STRENGTH) combination track and top rail aluminum extrusion weighing 4.75 lb/ft (7.03 kg/m). It will withstand a 2,000 lb (907.2 kg) reaction load.

F. Truck assembly: Swivel type, zinc die cast, with 4 sealed lubricant ball bearing wheels 2" (50

mm) in diameter. The load bearing wheels have an extruded dynamic load rating of 4,500 pounds each. And 2 side rolling wheels to ensure truck alignment in track. (No substitution) Truck assemblies are held to post brackets using 5/8” (16 mm) diameter stainless steel bolts which have a load rating of 11,000 pounds. Truck assembly to withstand 2,000 lb (907.2 kg) reaction load.

G. Bottom guide wheel assemblies: Each assembly shall consist of two 3” (75 mm) diameter

wheels with covers Per UL-325 and ASTM F 2200, straddling bottom horizontal gate rail, allowing adjustment to maintain gate frame plumb and in proper alignment. Attach one assembly to each guide post.

H. Gate post brackets, latch and keepers are galvanized steel.

I. Gate posts are 4" O.D. (101.6 mm) schedule 40 weighing 9.11 lb/ft (13.6 kg/m). Single gates with single tracks require 3 gate posts. (1 latch post and 2 support posts)

02832 - 3

Single gates with dual tracks require 5 gate posts. (1 latch and 2 dual support posts) Double gates require twice the number of support posts but do not have a latch post.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 POST INSTALLATION

A. Install posts per manufacturer’s recommendation.

B. Set posts in concrete. Dig holes having a diameter 4 times the diameter of the post, and 6" (152 mm) deeper than the bottom of the post. Posts set a minimum depth of 36" (914 mm) for all cantilever gates.

C. Check each post for vertical and top alignment.

3.02 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gate. Make sure that gate rolls free of binding.

B. Attach latch and make sure that gate is received by latch in a secure manner. 3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean up debris and remove from the site.

END OF SECTION

02930 - 1

SECTION 02930 TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVER

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The work in this section to include providing all equipment, labor, tools, materials, tests, permits, and other related items necessary for the installation of all plant materials as shown on the drawings and/or as specified in the Specifications.

B. The work in this section includes: 1. Trees, plants, and groundcover. 2. Staking. 3. Mulching. 4. Fertilizer. 5. Pruning. 6. Weed Control. 7. Root Barriers. 8. Maintenance. 9. Inspections

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 02810 - Irrigation.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Topsoil placed and graded to a grade tolerance of + 0.1, prior to start of the landscape work.

B. Grass and weed removal for planting areas shall be performed per these specifications.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A300 - Tree Care Operations - Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant

Maintenance - Standard Practices. 2. ANSI Z60.1 - Nursery Stock.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Certified Confirmed Orders: Certify in writing to the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE within thirty (30) days of the award of the contract, confirmed orders for plants and provide the quantity, location, phone number and address of the grower who has agreed to provide any plant material. Should the CONTRACTOR neglect to provide this documentation within the allocated time, CONTRACTOR may forfeit any substitution benefits.

02930 - 2

C. Certificates: Certificates required by law shall accompany shipments. Upon completion of the installation, submit certificates to the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.

D. Quantity Certification: Provide certification of quantities of mulch, fertilizer, herbicide, and planting accessories delivered to the site.

E. Product Data: Prior to or in conjunction with any Substitution Request, submit the manufactures product information for all materials proposed to be used in this scope of this section.


A. Tree Pruning: ANSI A300 Pruning Standards for Woody Plants.

B. Field Superintendent - Provide one person who shall: 1. Be present at all times during execution of work in this section; 2. Be familiar with the materials and best methods for installation; and 3. Direct work performed under this section.

C. Government Inspection: All plants and planting material shall meet or exceed the specifications of federal, state, and county laws requiring inspection for plant disease and control.

D. Industry Standards: Quality definitions, size tolerances and caliper-to-height ratios shall be no less than minimums specified in American Standards for Nursery Stock, published by American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., ANSI Z60.1-1990.

E. OWNER reserves the right to reject any or all plant material at any time until final review and acceptance. Remove rejected plants immediately from site.

F. Produce upon request, sales receipts for all nursery stock and certificates of inspection from federal, state, and other authorities.

1.06 CHANGE ORDERS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all plants of the size, species, variety, and quality noted and specified. If unavailable, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE in writing immediately and provide the names and telephone numbers of five (5) nursery suppliers that he has contacted. If substitution should be permitted, it can be made only with the prior written approval of the OWNER. The nearest variety, size, and grade as approved by the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall then be furnished.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: The CONTRACTOR installing work covered by this specification section must be a state licensed and bonded landscape CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR must be experienced in successful projects of similar size and complexity, provide landscape work of best-accepted trade practices and shall be the same CONTRACTOR responsible for the irrigation installation.

02930 - 3

B. Provide the equipment and personnel adequate to perform the work specified in the contracted duration, without impeding the progress of others trades.

C. CONTRACTOR must be familiar and comply with American Standard for Nursery Stock published by the American Association of Nurserymen.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Delivery: Notify OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE of delivery schedule so plant materials may be inspected upon job site delivery. Remove rejected unacceptable products immediately from job site.

C. Storage and Handling: Protect products against damage or dehydration. Cover plant roots and root balls with soil or other accepted material upon job site delivery if not to be planted within four hours. Store plant material in light shade and protect against harmful weather until planted. Maintain plant materials not to be planted within four hours.

D. Plant material damaged as a result of delivery, storage or handling will be rejected.

E. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of manufacturer. Store in a pre-determined location, dry and protected from inclement weather.


A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F or rise above 90 degrees F.

C. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph or if the soil is over saturated as to not support a standing person.

1.010 COORDINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.

B. Install plants after, and coordinate with, installation of underground irrigation system piping and sprinkler heads, and after installation of root barriers.

C. Coordinate the removal of grass and weeds for planting areas prior to work in this section.

02930 - 4

1.011 PROTECTION

A. Protect Existing Site Improvements: Verify location of underground facilities prior to doing work. Protect active service lines whether indicated or not. Repair and make good any damage to service lines or improvements caused by planting operations.

B. Barricade or Cover Excavations: Barricade or cover as necessary all excavations to protect pedestrians & workers.

C. CONTRACTOR is responsible for protecting plant material through final acceptance.

1.012 WARRANTY

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for warranties.

B. Warranty begins at date of Substantial Completion to be determined by the OWNER or at which time a minimum of 75 percent of the plant material for the entire project is installed and bark mulch placed.

C. Plant materials must be in healthy condition at end of a one-year warranty period, or for one full growing season from Substantial Completion, whichever is longer.

D. CONTRACTOR is responsible to assume liability for all plant material and to warranty plants against disease, insect infestation, desiccation, sun scald, freeze damage, or any other condition that would cause plants to be unhealthy or to die for one (1) year from Substantial Completion.

E. Replace all trees, shrubs, and groundcovers when plants are no longer in a satisfactory growing condition as determined by the OWNER for the duration of the Warranty period. Make replacements within seven (7) days of notification from the OWNER. Remove dead plants within two (2) days of notification and mark the planting plan showing the exact location of replaced plants.

F. CONTRACTOR is not responsible for damage to plants due to vandalism, theft, or accidental damage from pedestrians during the warranty period.

1.013 PERMITS, CODES, AND REGULATIONS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits and fees as required by local authority and prevailing ordinances and/or codes.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall keep fully informed and shall comply with all existing laws,

codes, ordinances, and regulations which in any way affect the conduct of the work. 1.014 INSPECTION

A. Plant Material: Inspections of the plant material by the Landscape Architect can be

arranged by the CONTRACTOR prior to delivery at the place of purchase at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to reject plant material at any time due to diminished health and quality of any plant material delivered to the site for planting.

02930 - 5

B. Plant Layout: Plant material layout inspections can be segmented as planting areas

become available. As described in Part 3.

C. Substantial Completion: Substantial Completion inspection shall occur when the majority of the plant material has been installed for the entire project, the irrigation system is in operation and in areas mulch has been placed. This may be segmented at the discretion of the OWNER. A Punch List of items to be completed or repaired by the CONTRACTOR will be prepared at this inspection by the OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE.

C. Final Inspection: Final Inspection is the presentation of the project to the OWNER and

Landscape Architect for approval. The CONTRACTOR will provide a full demonstration of all systems installed under this scope of work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUNDCOVER

A. All plants shall be nursery grown, or normal habit of growth, healthy, vigorous and free of disease, insect eggs and larvae. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery. Plants shall have all leaders and buds intact. Grading of plant material and root ball / container sizes shall be in accordance with the code of standards of the American Association of Nurserymen.

B. Provide the number of plants shown graphically on the Landscape Drawing or listed on the Plant Materials List, whichever is greater, or to cover at specified spacings.

C. Tree with multiple leaders, unless specified, will be rejected. Trees with a damaged or crooked leader, bark abrasions, sunscald, disfiguring knots, insect damage, or cuts of limbs over three quarter (3/4) inch in diameter that are not completely closed will be rejected.

D. Plants are required to be from stock acclimated to ‘Project Site’ environmental conditions, having been consistently cultivated and grown under these conditions.

E. Root Protection: Large plants Balled and Burlapped (B&B) with natural ball of size to ensure healthy growth. Small plants container-grown furnished in removable containers or integral peat pots well rooted to ensure healthy growth. Grow container plants in containers from six months to two years prior to delivery with roots filling container but not root bound.

F. Plant Names: Plants shall be true to name and plant tags shall remain on the plants until Final Acceptance. A minimum of one plant of each grouping planted shall be tagged with the common and botanical name and size of the plants in accordance with the standards of practice of the American Association of Nurserymen and shall conform to Standardized Plant Names, 1942 Edition, published by J. Horace McFarland Company. In all cases, botanical names shall take precedence over common names.

02930 - 6

2.02 FERTILIZER

A. Fertilizer: Agriform planting tablets, 10 and 21 gram.

2.03 PRE-EMERGENT HERBICIDE

A. Ronstar G, granular or equal.

2.04 MULCH MATERIALS

A. Bark Mulch: Commercial product, medium ground bark mulch. Bark shall be ground fir or hemlock bark of uniform color, free from weeds, seed, sawdust, and splinters and shall not contain resin, tannin, wood fiber or other compounds detrimental to plant life.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Tree Wrap: Corrugated or crepe paper, designed specifically to resist insect infestation and sun scald.

B. Stakes: 3 inch round x 8 feet, rough Douglas fir stakes, standard and better grade, free of large knots, pre-stained with one coat oil base wood stain, Olympic Redwood Natural Tone #717 or approved equal.

C. Cable and Accessories: 3/32 inch minimum 5 strand galvanized steel wire rope. Install 12 inch length of ¾ inch PVC pipe flag on evergreen guy wires (3) per tree, attached to remain clearly visible, bottom edge of the 12 inch length 3’-0” above grade. 5/16 inch galvanized turnbuckle cable clamps (3) per guy cable and galvanized eye hooks.

D. Tree Ties: Broad belt-type strapping or plastic chain (min. 1.5 inch width). Submit sample for approval.

2.06 WATER

A. CONTRACTOR shall make, at CONTRACTOR expense, whatever arrangements are necessary to ensure an adequate water delivery system to meet the needs of this Contract. The OWNER will make water available to the CONTRACTOR from the existing domestic water meter on site.

B. Water for plant irrigation must be clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter capable of inhibiting vigorous growth of plants.

2.07 ANTI-DESICCANT

A. Anti-desiccant shall be ‘Wilt-Pruf’, delivered in manufacturer’s containers and used in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

02930 - 7

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify prepared subsoil and planting beds are ready to receive the Work of this section, including the removal of grass and weeds per these specifications and as shown on the drawings.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate planting pits or beds for trees, shrubs, and groundcover consistent with good horticultural practices. The inside surfaces of all planting holes are to be rough, not smooth. If the CONTRACTOR encounters any unusual condition which, in his opinion, is detrimental to the new planting, he shall notify OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE immediately.

3.3 SOIL PREPARATION

A. Spread 2-1/2" of approved compost over all planting bed areas and fully incorporate by disking, tilling, hand spading, or other methods to a minimum depth of 6".

B. Finish grade area by floating and hand raking to an acceptable smooth, even grade.

Remove high points and fill low pockets to eliminate the possibility of standing water. All areas shall have positive drainage. Bring finished grade to 3" below adjacent curbs, walks and lawn grades to allow for the application of 2-1/2" of specified mulch.

3.04 PLANTING

A. CONTRACTOR shall field stake tree locations for approval. Make required field adjustments as directed without additional cost to the OWNER. The right to make minor adjustments in layout is reserved by the OWNER.

B. Place all plants as shown on drawings. Plant upright and orient to give best appearance or relationship to adjacent plants and structures. Notify OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE for review and approval of final orientation.

C. Tree Base: Place a 2" lightly compacted layer of prepared planting soil under root system.

D. Set plants in prepared pits or beds. Loosen and remove twine binding and burlap from top one-half of root balls. Weeds in the top of root balls must be removed prior to planting.

E. Place bare root plant materials so roots lie in natural position.

F. Cut off cleanly all broken or frayed roots.

G. Backfill planting hole with prepared planting soil material. When planting hole is one-half backfilled, fill with water and let stand until water is absorbed into soil. Continue

02930 - 8

topsoil fill and when planting hole is three-fourths filled, place planting tablets evenly spaced around each plant or tree. Provide the following quantities per plant or tree: 1. 4" potted plant: one 10 gram tablet. 2. Gallon container shrubs up to 12-inch spread: two 10 gram tablets. 3. Shrubs 15-inch to 36-inch spread: four 10 gram tablets. 4. Shrubs 36-inch and larger spread: three 21 gram tablets. 5. Evergreen trees: four 21 gram tablets. 6. Deciduous trees up to 1-1/2 inch caliper: three 21 gram tablets. 7. Deciduous trees 1-1/2 inch caliper: four 21 gram tablets. 8. Deciduous trees 2 inch and larger: five 21 gram tablets.

H. Place and compact topsoil backfill to finish grade and provide two (2) inch depressed water basin at each shrub and tree.

I. Water each plant thoroughly upon completion of planting. Initial water-in of trees and shrubs by underground sprinkler system is not permitted.

J. Remove non-biodegradable root containers and all plant pots from site.

3.05 WEED CONTROL

A. Apply pre-emergent herbicide according to the manufacturer's directions on the planting beds that will not be seeded, after planting and before mulching. No herbicide shall be applied to areas of annual flower plantings, as shown on plans. Herbicide must be applied by a licensed chemical applicator. WARNING: Pre-emergent herbicide will prevent germination of lawn grass seed. The CONTRACTOR shall use his best judgment during application procedures to avoid lateral movement of chemical into lawn areas. The CONTRACTOR may elect to skip certain portions of planting beds if lateral movement of chemical cannot be avoided. Notify OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE of areas that did not receive herbicide. CONTRACTOR is still responsible for weed control until final acceptance.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES

A. Tree Wrapping: Deciduous trees 1 ½” caliper and larger shall be wrapped the same day of planting to prevent sun scald, wrapping as approved by American Association of Nurserymen. Wrap spirally from ground line to the height of the second finish branches. Wrap in neat and snug manner and fasten at bottom, top and in the middle. Wrap before staking.

B. Stake all deciduous trees. Guy all evergreen trees. Refer to planting details.

C. Brace plants vertically with plant support(s) specified and per planting details.

D. CONTRACTOR shall make all possible efforts to provide favorable conditions for healthy plant growth, and should notify the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE immediately upon concerns and/or conflicts with design drawings.

3.07 FIELD PRUNING

A. Prune trees and shrubs to remove damaged branches. If subsequent pruning alters the natural character of the plant, the plant will be rejected.

02930 - 9

B. Cuts to more than 1/2 inch in diameter are not acceptable.

3.08 MULCH

A. Apply a 2-1/2" layer of specified mulch over all planting areas after planting and rake to a smooth finish grade.

3.09 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace plants or materials not meeting specified standards as determined by the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.

B. Areas are to be kept clean of all trash and debris related to this scope of work during progress of work until completion.

C. Pressure Washing of Concrete, Masonry and Asphaltic Paving: Any paved area or surfaces stained or soiled from landscaping materials having been hauled, carried or spilled over or around it shall be cleaned with a power pressure washing method using water under pressure that does not alter the surface. Building surfaces that are soiled due to landscape planting operation shall be washed with proper equipment and materials as approved by the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.

3.010 MAINTENANCE: GENERAL

A. Maintain plant life immediately after placement. Continue maintenance through Substantial Completion.

B. Protect and maintain work in this specification section against all defects of materials and workmanship. Maintenance of all the planted areas until shall include, but not be limited to, watering, mowing, weeding, herbicide and insecticide applications, cultivation of beds, mulch replacement, maintaining tree wrapping, guys, turnbuckles, and stakes, and pruning as well as replacement of any plants that appear to be in distress.

C. Irrigate when necessary to avoid drying out of plant materials, and to promote healthy growth.

D. It is understood that the OWNER will be responsible during the Warranty period for normal landscape maintenance of the project.


A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection services; AND, Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Plants will be rejected when ball of earth surrounding roots has been disturbed or damaged prior to or during planting.

END OF SECTION

02930 - 10

03100 - 1

SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK


A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork for cast-in place concrete. 2. Openings for other work. 3. Form accessories. 4. Form stripping.


1. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement. 2. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Appendix A - Geotechnical Report.

C. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section:

1. Section 04220 - Unit Masonry: Supply of masonry accessories for placement by this Section.

2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Supply of metal fabrications for placement by this Section.

3. Division 15 - Mechanical: Supply of mechanical items for placement by this Section.

4. Division 16 - Electrical: Supply of electrical items for placement by this Section. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete. 3. ACI 347R – Guide to Formwork for concrete.

B. Product Standard - U.S. Department of Commerce (PS):

1. PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete shall conform to required shape, line and dimension.

B. Tolerances: Conform to recommendations of ACI Standards.


A. Deliver products to Site, store, protect and handle under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.

03100 - 2

C. Store forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.

B. Coordinate this Section with other Sections of work which require attachment of components to formwork.

C. If formwork is placed after reinforcement resulting in insufficient concrete cover over

reinforcement, request instructions from Architect before proceeding. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS

A. Form Materials for Concealed Surfaces: Wood or Steel at the discretion of Contractor.

B. Form Materials for Exposed Surfaces: Plywood: Douglas Fir species; APA Structural 1, High Density Overlaid (HDO) one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean, true edges. 1. All material new for beginning of project. 2. Mill coat faces and seal all edges with polyurethane edge sealer; grade mark

each panel. Coat plywood with Nox-Crete Form Coating, or approved substitute. 3. Determine plywood thickness required for design pressures. 4. Use largest practicable sizes to minimize joints, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Lumber: Construction grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.

2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Form Ties: Removable type, adjustable in length to permit tightening of forms and not have any lugs, cones, washers to act as spreader within form, nor leave a hole larger than ¾ inch diameter, or a depression in exposed concrete surface, or leave metal closer ½ inches to concrete surface. Wire ties not permitted. Cutting ties back from concrete face not permitted.

B. Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete, absorb

moisture, or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete; MagicKote, Nox-Crete, Burke Release, or equal.

C. Chamfer Strip: Burke Concrete Accessories, or equal.

D. Vinyl Reglets: Extruded vinyl with covered face or filled to prevent intrusion of concrete

or debris.

E. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.

03100 - 3

[F. Round Column Form: Sleek/tubes, seamless standard wall, manufactured by Smurfit

Corporation, or equal.] PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with Drawings.

3.02 EARTH FORMS

A. Earth forms are not permitted, except as specially noted on the structural drawings or required by soil report.

3.03 FORMWORK

A. Standard Specifications: Construct formwork to comply with ACI 301 and ACI 347R.

B. Erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to safely support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by concrete.

C. Construct forms to support assumed values of live load, dead load, ambient

temperature, soil pressures, seismic stresses, and other factors pertinent to safely during construction.

D. Construct formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to cast-

in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.

E. Construct forms to obtain concrete sizes and shapes shown on Drawings. Adjust forms to obtain accurate alignment and level and plumb work. Verify field dimensions and elevations.

F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete

surfaces.

G. Bevel or kerf wood inserts for forming keyways and recesses to assure easy removal. H. Where interior area of formwork is inaccessible, provide temporary openings for

cleanout and inspection before concrete placement. I. Locate temporary openings on forms in as inconspicuous a location as possible. Brace

temporary closures and set tight to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

3.04 FORMWORK FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE

A. Drill forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie holes.

B. Do not use patched form facing material for exposed concrete surfaces.

03100 - 4

C. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections.

D. Use extra studs, walers, and bracing to prevent bowing of forms between studs and to

avoid bowed appearance in concrete. E. Form molding shapes, recesses and projections with smooth-finish materials, and

install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement.

F. Do not end grain of plywood and end grain of wood form boards as forming surfaces. 3.05 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT

A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.

C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes

or applied coverings which are effected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.

3.06 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS

A. Provide formed openings where required for items scheduled to be embedded in or passing through concrete work.

B. Locate and set in place items scheduled to be cast directly into concrete. C. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets,

recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. Use settings diagrams, templates, and instructions by others for locating and setting embedments.

D. Provide opening in formwork for penetrating materials. Accurately place and securely

support items built into forms.

E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of Regulatory Agencies, straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.

3.07 SLEEVES

A. Contractor to verify, coordinate, and be responsible for locating and placing sleeves for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, fire protection, landscape, irrigation lines that penetrate concrete elements.

3.08 SHORING CONSTRUCTION

A. Construct shoring to safely support the work without excessive stress or deflection. Make shoring adjustable to correct for settlement during concrete placement.

03100 - 5

B. Keep shores in place until the concrete has attained its required strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed.

C. Remove shores in planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete.

3.09 FORM CLEANING

A. Clean and remove foreign matter within forms as erection proceeds.

B. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.

C. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.

D. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts

or water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within heat enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.

3.10 FORMWORK TOLERANCES

A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301 and 347R. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.

B. Do not reuse wood formwork for concrete surfaces scheduled to be exposed to view.

Do not patch formwork utilized to construct concrete exposed to view. 3.12 FORM REMOVAL

A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its

own weight and imposed construction and design loads.

B. Remove forms in accordance with requirements of ACI 318, except do not remove any forms before expiration of following times from time of concrete placement. 1. Footings: 24 hours. 2. To facilitate float finishing of formed surfaces, remove forms at earliest time

practicable without possibility of injury to concrete.

C. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.

END OF SECTION

03200 – 1

SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT


A. Section Includes: 1. Reinforcement and accessories for cast-in-place concrete.


1. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. 2. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Section 04220 - Unit Masonry: Reinforcement. 4. Appendix A - Geotechnical Report

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Reinforced Concrete. 3. ACI SP-66 - American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ANSI/ASTM):

1. ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 1. CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Manual of Practice. 2. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice For Placing Reinforcing Bars. 3. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice For Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and

Nomenclature. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing devices.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301, ACI SP-66, ACI 318.

1.05 COORDINATION


03200 – 3

B. Coordinate with placement of formwork, formed openings and other Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615; deformed billet steel bars, plain finish. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type.

B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318. 1. Do not heat bars for bending. 2. Bars with offsets or bends not conforming to Drawings will be rejected.

B. Locate reinforcing splices, at point of minimum stress. Review location of splices with Structural Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT

A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Place in conformance with ACI 318. Do not deviate from required position.

B. Accommodate placement of formed openings.

C. Laps as specified in structural drawings. D. Avoid damage to vapor barrier membrane.

E. Clean reinforcement of loose scale or other deleterious material.

F. Locate and support with metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers as

required. G. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward surfaces.

H. Provide not less than following reinforcement unless otherwise indicated on the

Structural Drawings: 1. All concrete: Minimum 0.0025 times cross-sectional area of concrete in each

direction.

03200 – 3

2. Corner bars: Same size, quantity, and spacing as horizontal reinforcement at wall and footing corners and intersections.

I. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as noted on the structural drawings.


A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. END OF SECTION

03300 - 1

SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place concrete footings, foundation walls, and retaining walls. 2. Floors slabs on grade, and exterior concrete walks and exterior miscellaneous

slabs. 3. Expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work.


1. Section 01400 - Quality Control Testing 2. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork 4. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork 5. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement 6. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing 7. Section 07900 - Sealants 8. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring 9. Section 09671 - Textured Floor Coatings 10. Mechanical – See Drawings

C. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:

1. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for concrete.

2. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete. 3. ACI 304R - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and

Placing Concrete. 4. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 7. ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete. 8. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.


1. D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

2. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. 4. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. 5. ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

03300 - 2

6. ASTM C494 - Chemicals Admixtures for Concrete.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Mix Proportions and Design Reports: Submit written report to Architect for each proposed concrete mix at least 10 days prior to start of work. 1. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience method,

complying with ACI 301, Chapter 3.8, Method 1 or 2. 2. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed and are

acceptable to Architect. 3. Mix designs may be adjusted when material characteristics, job conditions,

weather, test results or other circumstances warrant. 4. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and accepted by Architect.

C. Certificate: Furnish testing agency's certification that materials furnished meet or

exceed requirements of this specification.

D. Project Record Documents: 1. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. 2. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which

are concealed from view. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI Standards.

B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.

C. Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

D. Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. E. Field Samples:

1. Provide under provisions of Section 01400. 2. Construct field sample for architectural concrete surfaces receiving special

treatment, color, or finish. 3. Sample Panel: Construct one panel, 10 feet long by 10 feet wide, to indicate

special treatment or finish required. 4. Obtain Architect's acceptance of finish prior to proceeding. 5. Accepted sample panel is considered basis of quality for finished work. Keep

sample panel exposed to view for duration of concrete work. 6. Accepted sample may remain as part of Work.

1.05 CONVEYING A. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods to prevent separation

or loss of materials.

03300 - 3

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Place no concrete without testing unless acceptable to Architect.

B. Cold Weather Conditions: Comply with applicable provisions of ACI 306R and following: 1. Do not place concrete when temperature is below 40 degrees F. unless

acceptable to Architect. 2. Provide adequate equipment for heating concrete materials. 3. Protect concrete during freezing or near freezing weather. 4. Keep free of frost all concrete materials, reinforcement, forms, fillers, and ground

with which concrete is to come in contact. 5. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice.

C. Hot weather conditions comply with applicable provisions of ACI 305R and following: 1. Protect concrete to prevent excessive concrete temperatures or water

evaporation which will impair required strength or serviceability of member or structure.

D. Exercise caution when placing and vibrating concrete on rigid insulation to ensure

against damage and displacement. 1.07 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Type II.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: 1. Normal weight aggregate: ASTM C33. 2. Graduation of combined aggregates shall be within the following limits:

Sieve Size 3/4" Max Agg.*

2" 100 1 ½" 100 1" 100 ¾" 90-100

3/8" 60-80 #4 40-60 #8 30-45

#16 20-35 #30 12-25 #50 5-15

03300 - 4

#100 0-5

*(Percent Passing Sieve)

C. Water: Fresh, Clean and Potable. 2.02 ADMIXTURES

A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C494. 1. Type A - Water Reducing Admixture.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Bonding Agent: Sonocrete or Sonobound by Sonneborn, Masco Bond S.B.R. or approved.

B. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement,

water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days with non-shrink grout.

C. Patching Compound: Sonopatch by Sonneborn, RAECO "R-25" and as approved by

Architect and compatible with floor covering and floor covering adhesive. D. Curing/Sealer Compound: Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn, Mascocure Kure-N-Seal, or

approved substitute at all non colored concrete.

E. Preformed Expansion Joint Devices and Filler Materials: 1. Joint Filler: ASTM D1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 3/8" thick x 3 ½", manufactured by Burke or equal.

F. Joint Caps:

1. At exterior plaza expansion joints with joint sealer use removable plastic expansion joints caps, 3/8 inch deep, 3/8 inch wide; manufactured by Burke or equal.

G. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel formed to tongue and groove

profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge; Keyed-Kold joint manufactured by Burke, or Cardinal Form a Key or equal.

H. Exterior Concrete Sealer: Sonnenborn, Kure-N-Seal, 0800 or approved.

I. Interior saw Cut and Construction Joint Fillers: MM80 Epoxy as manufactured by

Metzger/McGuire, at exposed concrete areas only. In areas where floor covering will be installed over concrete, use Edge-Pro XL in lieu of MM80. Install backer rod to 75% of joint depth before placing Edge-Pro XL joint filler. Consult with flooring manufacturer and Metzger/McGuire, (800) 223-MM80, prior to installation of joint fillers to insure compatibility with flooring materials and concrete slab requirements.

03300 - 5

2.04 CONCRETE MIX

A. Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 301, and 304R. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301.

C. Provide concrete to follow a minimum criteria or as indicated on the Structural

drawings:

D. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.

E. Use of calcium chloride will not be approved.

F. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect.

G. Add air entrainment agent to mix to provide 5% +/- air entrainment for concrete

exposed to freeze-thaw cycling.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.

B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.

C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing

concrete, insert steel dowels adhere with epoxy or urethane resin adhesive. Approved products: Sup-R-Resin 39Z by U.S.E. Company, Epcon Ceramic G capsule anchors by Ramset Corp., Parafast Resin mortar cartige by Emhart Co., or approved.

3.03 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Place and consolidate concrete in accordance with ACI 304R, ACI 301, and ACI 318.

B. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joint fillers, and joint devices are not disturbed during concrete placement.

03300 - 6

C. Install joint fillers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 3/8 inch of finished slab surface.

Conform to Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements.

E. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Install construction joints in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.

G. Install joint device anchors and joint dowels where required. Maintain correct position

to allow joint flush with floor finish, and dowels aligned and perpendicular to joint.

H. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07900. D. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air

temperature, and test samples taken.

E. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.

F. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.

G. Sequence floor slab pours to minimize shrinkage effects. N. During hot weather follow the recommendations of ACI 305 or as specified to prevent

problems in the manufacturing, placing, and curing of concrete that can adversely affect the properties and serviceability of the hardened concrete.

O. During cold weather follow the recommendations of ACI 306 or as specified to prevent

freezing of concrete and to permit concrete to gain strength properly.

P. Consolidation: 1. Consolidate placed concrete in accordance with ACI 309 using mechanical

vibrating equipment with supplemental hand rodding and tamping to work concrete around reinforcement, embedded items and into all parts of forms. a. Use only internal type vibrating equipment capable of maintaining minimum

speed of 6000 impulses per minute when operating submerged in concrete. b. Use adequate number of units to properly consolidate all concrete.

2. Operate vibrating equipment using only qualified workers under experienced supervision.

3. Space and pattern vibrator points of application to produce visual proof of effectiveness over entire surface of concrete being placed. a. Insert and remove vibrators with vertical movements only and without lateral

movement while immersed. b. Do not use vibrator to move concrete laterally. c. Adjust spacing of insertions to concrete mix and to provide consolidation

without segregation.

03300 - 7

Q. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Using 3/16 inch thick blade, cut as shown

on the Structural Drawings. R. Screed slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft.

at exterior slabs and 1/8 inch in 10 ft. at interior slabs.

S. All exposed exterior concrete shall be sealed.

T. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor barrier material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.

3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301.

B. Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed sack rubbed finish. C. Interior Slabs:

1. Steel troweled, dense, and smooth. 2. Make minimum of two passes, but not more than necessary. 3. Finish with steel trowel flat.

D. Bullfloat entire surface of slabs to true plane.

1. Float perpendicular to screeds. 2. Complete floating before free water collects on surface. 3. After surface water, if any, has evaporated, perform, initial edging and jointing. 4. Use metal float on air-entrained concrete.

E. Do not dust surface with dry cement or sand during finishing.

H. Sealer: (See Attached Euclid Chemical Company Sealer and Joint Filler specs for

Warehouse floor) 1. Following completion of work by all trades, and just prior to occupancy, apply

second coat of curing compound to all exterior slabs and walkways scheduled to remain exposed.

2. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.

B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for

period necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.

C. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308. 1. Place curing compound as per manufacturer recommendations. 2. Begin curing flatwork immediately after finisher has completed 300 sq. ft.

maximum of work; each section of formed work as soon after placing as practical. 3. Do not use curing compounds on concrete slabs scheduled to receive ceramic

03300 - 8

tile. 4. Verify compatibility of curing compounds with flooring materials manufacture prior

to installation. D. Protection:

1. Cover and protect all permanently exposed concrete with heavy, non-staining kraft paper unless otherwise indicated.

2. Use planks or plywood on slabs at points of heavy traffic where surfaces remain permanently exposed.

3. Protect concrete surfaces to remain exposed from other concrete, mortar, cleaning of other construction, application of bituminous materials and from scarring or other damage.

4. Do not permit rain water or water used in curing, to wash down over faces of exposed concrete.


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301 and under provisions of Section 01400.

B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.

C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to testing firm for review prior to

commencement of Work.

D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements.

E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 yards or less for each class of

concrete placed.

F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents.

G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.

3.08 PATCHING

A. Notify Architect to review concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.

B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect upon discovery.

C. Patch imperfections as directed by Architect in accordance with ACI 301.

3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. Definition of Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details,

03300 - 9

dimensions, tolerances, consistent color, or specified requirements.

B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Architect. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express

direction of Architect for each individual area. D. Remove from Project all concrete which:

1. Does not meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Contains shrinkage cracks closer than 15 ft. o.c. 3. Contains wood, debris, or other foreign matter. 4. Contains voids or rock pockets. 5. Is not true to intended shape, alignment, grade, color, finish, and texture. 6. Is not plumb and level where so intended.

3.10 EQUIPMENT BASES AND FOUNDATIONS

A. Miscellaneous Concrete Items: Provide as detailed, and form to proper heights and area. Finish top surfaces with smooth integral cement finish. Apply steel trowel finish to bases, except where schedule to receive other finishes. Bases are sized for specified equipment. If equipment is modified by Contractor thus requiring modification in base sizes, such modification shall be made at no increase in the Contract Amount.

B. Filling In: Fill in holes, voids and openings left in concrete for passage of work by other

trades, unless otherwise shown or directed. Mix, place and cure concrete to blend in with the concrete already in place.

3.11 SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Remove fins and projections. Thoroughly clean with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified grout or patching compound.

B. Fill honeycomb voids and rock pockets with patching compound in proportions as

recommended by specified manufacturer.

C. Prepare grout or patching compound to match color and texture of adjacent concrete when dry. Compact material well in place, screed slightly higher than surrounding surface, allow one to two hours for initial shrinkage, finish to match adjoining work, striking off excess mortar at surface.

D. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.

E. Provide patching compound over interior concrete slabs which, in Architect's opinion,

are rough or uneven to provide a satisfactory base for floor coverings.

F. Grind down edges and rough slab edges to receive flooring. 3.12 CLEANING

A. All exposed concrete surface to be thoroughly cleaned prior to acceptance of finish

03300 - 10

construction. END OF SECTION

04100 - 1

SECTION 04100 MORTAR

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Mortar and grout for masonry.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 01400 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. 3. Section 04220 - Unit Masonry. 4. Section 14210 - Elevator

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete. 2. ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 3. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement. 4. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 5. ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. 6. ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete. 7. ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 8. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry. 9. ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain

and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 10. ASTM C1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.

B. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): 1. Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot or Cold Weather

Masonry Construction.

C. Reinforced Concrete Masonry Construction Inspectors Handbook: Recommended practices for masonry construction.


A. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Section 01600.

B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign matter.


A. Perform masonry work in accordance with the International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC) Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

04100 - 2

B. Wet Weather: Provide suitable cover over work exposed to weather. Maintain cover over finished work until application of sealer applied and cap flashing installed.

C. Cold Weather: When outside temperature is below 40 degrees F. or is expected to fall

below freezing within 48 hours (Weather Bureau Forecast), heat materials and provide suitable enclosures to maintain temperatures exceeding 40 degrees F. in masonry work in place for 48 hours after completion. Obtain approval of methods of protection before proceeding.

1.05 MIX TESTS

A. Test mortar in accordance with ASTM C780.

B. Test mortar in accordance with ASTM C780.

C. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019. 1.06 WARRANTY: Provide five (5) year written warranty on materials and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I gray color.

B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

D. Premix Mortar: ASTM C387, using gray cement, Normal strength.

E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.

F. Water: Clean and potable.

G. Sand: ASTM C144

H. Mortar Color: Provide Davis Mortar color as selected at Brick Masonry Units only. Integral color mortar 3 – 5 lbs/ sack range will be used at Brick only and natural gray Mortar will be used at Concrete Masonry Units.

2.02 ADMIXTURES

A. Plasticizer for Grout: Water reducing type which reduces porosity and absorption to increase bond strength; Grout Aid manufactured by Sika.

B. At all integrally colored block provide 'Dry-Block' mortar additive by W.R. Grace at a

rate as recommended by manufacturer. 2.03 MORTAR MIXES

04100 - 3

A. Mortar for Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S utilizing Proportion Method to

achieve 1,800 psi. strength, or as indicated on Drawings. 2.04 MORTAR MIXING

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with ASTM C270 and C780.

B. Mix mortar by mechanical equipment only.

C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar.

D. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within two hours of mixing.

E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F, or

two-and-one-half hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F. 2.05 GROUT MIXES

A. Bond Beams, Lintels, etc. 2000 psi strength at 28 days; 9-11 inches slump; premixed type in accordance with ASTM C94.

2.06 GROUT MIXING

A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix.

C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of grout.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean existing adjacent masonry surfaces of loose mortar.

B. Protect existing adjacent surfaces from mortar stains. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install mortar and grout to requirements of specific masonry Sections.

C. Accessory Placement: Embed concealed flashing and masonry accessories as indicated and required.

D. Mortar Setting: Do not use mortar which has begun to set or is beyond the

04100 - 4

recommended elapsed time since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during the recommended elapsed time period only to restore workability.

E. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.

F. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.

G. Remove grout spaces of excess mortar.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 109, 1,800 psi at 28 days. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjusting: Remove mortar from masonry unit cavities where solid grout is required. Remove and reinstall masonry units not in alignment or not bonded by mortar.

B. Joint Repair: Rake and re-point masonry joints where directed.

C. Cleaning: Remove excess mortar from the site.

END OF SECTION

04210 - 1

SECTION 04210 BRICK VENEER MASONRY


A. Section Includes: 1. Brick units. 2. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.


1. Section 04100 - Mortar: Mortar and grout. 2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at expansion joints.

C. Products Installed but not Furnished Under this Section:

1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of loose steel lintels and Miscellaneous steel items.

2. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Placement of reglets for flashings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): 1. IMIAC - Recommended practices and guide specification for hot or cold weather

masonry construction.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Submit Manufacturer's installation and cleaning instructions. 2. Submit Manufacturer's recommendations for removal of efflorescence.

C. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of face brick units to illustrate color, texture and

extremes of color range.

D. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience with projects of comparable size and type.

04210 - 2


A. Deliver products to Site, store, protect, and handle under provisions of Section 01600.

B. Accept brick units on site. Inspect for damage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

1. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


B. Coordinate masonry work with installation of steel lintels. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Brick Manufacturers: 1. Mutual Materials


2.02 BRICK UNITS

A. Face Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS Grade SW; wire cut texture and color to match existing.

B. Brick Masonry Units: Nominal modular size to match existing. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Provide reinforcement and anchorage as specified and noted on Structural Drawings.

B. Provide DA 213 or Hohmann & Barnard DW 10 - with seismic clip #9 HD wire in horizontal joints every 16" or as requested by the engineer. All ties hot dipped galvanized.

2.04 CLEANING SOLUTIONS

A. Fabrikleen Masonry Cleaner, or approved equal. Clean and wash all exposed surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer and brick supplier.

2.05 SEALER

A. Fabricshield 761 waterbase sealer, or approved equal. Apply sealer to all exposed surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer and brick supplier.

04210 - 3

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

3.03 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Coursing: 1. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. 2. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal

joints of uniform thickness. 3. Lay brick units in running bond. Form concave mortar joints.

B. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with

other work.

C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.

D. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses.

E. Interlock intersections and external corners.

F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

G. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean,

unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

H. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with control joint.

I. Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch. 2. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. 3. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet

or more.

04210 - 4

4. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch. 5. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10

feet; 1/2 inch in 30 feet. 6. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet.

3.04 WEEPS AND VENTS

A. Install weep holes in veneer at 36 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf angles, and at bottom of walls.

3.05 CAVITY WALL

A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep holes. 3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - VENEER MASONRY

A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated on Structural Drawings.

B. Secure wall ties to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer as indicated on Structural Drawings.

3.07 MASONRY FLASHINGS

A. Extend flashings through veneer, turn up minimum 8 inches and seal to sheathing over framed back-up.

B. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.

C. Use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive and sealer.

3.08 LINTELS

A. Install loose steel lintels over door openings.

B. Maintain minimum 28 inch bearing on each side of opening. 3.09 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through expansion joints.

B. Form expansion joint as detailed. 3.10 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Cut and fit for pipes conduit and coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain Architect approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where

appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

01 January 06 04210 - 5

3.11 CLEANING

A. Apply cleaner within 7-10 days of laying as recommended by the manufacturer and brick supplier.

B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears.

C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.


A. Protect finished installation as required.

B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities.

C. Cover and protect all wall areas completed at the end of each day.

END OF SECTION

04220 - 1

SECTION 04220 UNIT MASONRY


A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.


1. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Testing Services. 2. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. 3. Section 04100 - Mortar: Mortar and Grout. 4. Section 07120 - Fluid Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing. 5. Section 07900 - Sealant. 6. Section 09900 - Paint 7. Section 14210 - Elevator

C. Products Installed but not Furnished Under this Section:

1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement miscellaneous fabricated steel items.

2. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Placement of reglets for flashings. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM C90 - Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 4. ASTM C145 - Solid Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.

B. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC):

1. IMIAC Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

C. Reinforced Concrete Masonry Construction Inspectors Handbook: Recommended

practices for hot and cold weather masonry construction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum three years documented experience with projects of comparable size and type.

B. Design Strength:

1. Concrete Masonry Unit: Fm' = 1,500 psi and special inspection shall be required. 2. Fm' shall be established prior to start of construction by prism testing according

to the building code.

04220 - 2

C. Prism Tests during Construction: 1. Construct 3 fully grouted prisms for each 5,000 square feet of wall area. 2. Prism tests shall be in addition to mortar and grout tests specified elsewhere. 3. Testing of prisms: In accordance with ASTM E447-84.


A. Deliver products to Site, store and protect under provisions of Section 01600.

B. Deliver units on covered pallets.

C. Accept masonry units on site. Inspect for damage. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform masonry work in accordance with the International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC) Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

B. Wet Weather: Provide suitable cover over work exposed to weather. Maintain cover

over finished work until application of sealer applied and cap flashing installed.

C. Cold Weather: When outside temperature is below 40 degrees F. or is expected to fall below freezing within 48 hours (Weather Bureau Forecast), heat materials and provide suitable enclosures to maintain temperatures exceeding 40 degrees F. in masonry work in place for 48 hours after completion. Obtain approval of methods of protection before proceeding.


A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. 1.07 WARRANTY: Provide five (5) year written warranty on materials and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Concrete Masonry Unit Manufacturers: 1. Mutual Materials Co.


2.02 MATERIALS A. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units: ASTM C90, Medium Weight. 2. Block Units: Split Face, Ground Face, Smooth Face, and Five Score Fluted 3. Concrete Masonry Units Size:

a. Nominal modular size as noted in schedule at end of section. Provide

04220 - 3

special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, lintels, and any other sizes or shapes as required.

b. Strength: Average of 3 units not less that 2100 psi, with individual units not less than 1900 psi or as required to achieve a prism strength of fm' = 1700 psi.

c. Weight: Dry unit net weight at painted units at 105 to 125 pounds per cubic foot.

C. Reinforcement and Anchorage:

1. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, unprotected finish.

2. Masonry Rebar Positioner: As manufactured by A.A. Wire Products Company or approved.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Lath: 3.4 lb. galvanized diamond mesh, self-furring or approved.

B. Steel Jamb Anchors: Type A and Web-Tie Flex-o-Lock by A.A. Wire Products Co., or approved.

2.04 CLEANING SOLUTIONS

A. Concrete Masonry Units: Fabrikleen Type ‘V’ Masonry Cleaner, or approved equal. Clean and wash all exposed surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer and block supplier.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located.

C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Standards: Comply with the Latest Edition of the building code.

04220 - 4

B. Unit Cutting: Cut as required for openings and joints.

C. Unit Placement:

1. Install units plumb and true. 2. Use special units where required. 3. Set units flush on exposed side of wall and allow variation in unit thickness to run

on concealed face of wall. 4. Where masonry wall is scheduled to be painted on interior side of wall, provide

least amount of variation between units possible for even wall surface.

D. Joint Size and Profile: 1. Concrete Masonry Units: 3/8" thick, tooled concave joint at all concrete masonry.

E. Temporary Framework: Provide temporary support until masonry walls develop

required strength.

F. Grouting: Place grout in masonry units with low-lift grouting techniques. 3.04 PLACING AND BONDING

A. Coursing: 1. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. 2. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal

joints of uniform thickness. 3. Lay masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to

equal 8 inches. Form concave tooled mortar joints at both faces of wall.

B. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.

C. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding low head and bed joints.

D. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.

E. Remove excess mortar as Work progresses.

F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where

adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

G. Perform jobsite cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

H. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members as indicated.

I. Tolerances:

1. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch. 2. Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch in 20 feet

or more. 3. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet non-cumulative; 1/2 inch in

two stories or more.

04220 - 5

4. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet and 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

5. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. 6. Maximum Variation From Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.

J. At the end of each day, cover all masonry work with flashing to protect wall from water

migration during construction. 3.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY:

A. Rebar Inspection: Reject bars with reduced cross section or bends not shown on shop drawings.

B. Reinforcing: Place reinforcing as indicated on Structural Drawings. Secure vertical

bars with bar positioners at 4'-0" o.c.

C. Anchors and Inserts: Install where detailed. Install reglets in mortar joints where flashing meets masonry.

D. Metal Lath: Place lath under bond beams over non- reinforced vertical cells.

E. Concealed Masonry Flashing: Place where detailed and required to protect wall from

moisture penetration. 3.06 GROUTED COMPONENTS

A. Provide as indicated on Drawings. 3.07 BUILT-IN WORK

A. Anchors and Inserts: Install where detailed. Install reglets in mortar joints where flashing meets masonry.

B. Metal Lath: Place lath under bond beams over non-reinforced vertical cells.

C. Concealed flashing: Place where detailed and required to protect wall from moisture

penetration.

D. As work progresses, build in metal door frames anchor bolts plates and other items furnished by other Sections.

E. Build in items plumb and level.

F. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with

grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.

G. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.

3.08 CUTTING AND FITTING

04220 - 6

A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, and sleeves. Coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

B. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or

where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.09 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears.

C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

F. Clean and wash all exposed masonry unit surfaces with masonry cleaner. Interior surfaces to be rinsed with neutral solution of ammonia and water. All work to be left in clean and serviceable condition, and ready for interior finishes.


A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.

B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities.

C. Cover and protect all wall areas completed at the end of each day.

3.11 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove misplaced, broken or unbonded masonry units.

B. Clean masonry units as directed.

END OF SECTION

05120 - 1

SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL


A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel framing members, baseplates and support members. 2. Grouting under baseplates. 3. Priming for finish painting.


1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Non-framing fabrications affecting structural steel work.

2. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing. 3. Section 09900 - Painting: Finish painting.

C. Products Furnished but not Installed Under this Section:

1. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Anchors for casting into concrete. 2. Section 04220 - Unit Masonry: Anchors for embedding into masonry.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel

for Buildings.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A572 - Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53 - Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. 3. ASTM A108 - Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality. 4. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products. 5. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 6. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 7. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing in Round and Shapes. 8. ASTM A375 - High Strength bolts.

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):

1. SSPC Painting Manual, Volume II, Systems and Specifications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


05120 - 2

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members. 2. Connections. Distinguish between Shop and Field Connections. 2. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld

lengths. 4. Paint and painting data.


A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC-Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.

B. At exposed steel perform work in accordance with AISC - Specification for Architectural

Exposed Structural Steel.

C. Design connections not detailed on Drawings under direct supervision of Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed at place where Project is located.

D. Qualifications:

1. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience.

2. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience.


A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. Notify Architect and

Structural Engineer of discrepancies immediately. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Members, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A572.

B. Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B.

D. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

1. Welding Electrodes: E70XX, unless otherwise noted.

F. Grout: Non-shrink type, ASTM C827, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days; Five Star Grout, Fosroc Conbextra, Target Portland expanding grout or approved substitute.

05120 - 3

G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide.

H. Connection: Fabrication of welded construction, drill and tap as required to receive hardware and similar items. Include required anchors for building into other work.

I. Structural Connectors: Furnish custom fabricated bolts, plates, tie rods, anchors,

dowels, and other steel shapes for framing, supporting, and anchoring framing.

J. Loose Bearing Plates: Provide for framing members bearing on masonry or concrete as indicated.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Shop-fabricate all work in complete units where possible.

B. Verify and be responsible for exact field measurements as required for fabricated work to fit job conditions.

C. Camber steel girders and beams as indicated. D. Perform all necessary cutting, punching, drilling and tapping required for:

1. Attachment of other work coming in contact with structural steel. 2. Where indicated or where directions for same are given prior to or with review of

Shop Drawings. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, make bolt holes 1/16 inch larger than required

fastener diameter.

E. Except where indicated, perform no field cutting or burning. F. Form work true to detail with clean, straight, sharply detailed profiles.

1. Make exposed joints close fitting and where least conspicuous. 2. Have field connections, other than shown on Drawings, accepted by Architect.

G. Welding:

1. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. 2. Grind exposed welds smooth, flush and ready for paint finish.

2.03 FINISH

A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-2.

B. Shop prime structural steel members with one coat of primer. Do not prime surfaces that will be field welded or in contact with concrete.

C. Galvanize structure components exposed to weather to shop prime G-90 standard.


05120 - 4

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. Notify Architect of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.

B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.

3.02 ERECTION

A. Field Assembly: 1. Assemble steel to lines and elevations indicated, within tolerances specified by

AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice. 2. Provide holes in members to permit connecting work of other trades when

furnished with templates or required information. 3. Bring assembled parts into close contact. 4. Use drift pins only to positions members. 5. Do not enlarge or distort holes. 6. Where required for proper alignment, provide short slotted holes.

B. Temporary Bracing: Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to

maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Field Connections:

1. Provide bolted connections, except where welded connections are indicated, as follows: a. Use high strength threaded fasteners where indicated on Structural

Drawings. b. Tighten nuts of high strength bolted connections, with properly calibrated

wrenches, to not less than minimum bolt tension, for size of bolt used, in accordance with AISC requirements. Check each calibrated wrench at least once daily for accuracy under actual conditions of application.

c. Mark completely tightened bolts with identifying symbol. 2. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on Drawings.

D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer. Field correction of fabrication errors by gas cutting torch is NOT permitted without Architect's written acceptance.

E. Base Plates and Bearing Plates:

1. Support attached column bases with wedges or shims of type and in manner to permit installation of grout without interference or necessity for removal of wedges or shims.

2. Support base plates and large bearing plates on steel wedges or shims until support members have been plumbed, Grout solid entire bearing area after plumbing.

3. Mix place and cure grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Erection Tolerances:

1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative. 2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

3.03 PAINTING

05120 - 5

A. Thoroughly clean surfaces of all dirt, rust, grease and loose mill scale in conformance

with requirements with SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning.

B. Shop apply one prime coat on all steel surfaces except as otherwise specified. 1. Do not paint surface:

a. Within 2 in. of field welds or contact surfaces within friction type joints using high strength bolts.

b. Encased in concrete. 2. Apply shop coat before shipping.

C. Apply two coats to all surfaces which will be inaccessible after erection.

1. Minimum coating dryfilm thickness: a. Single coat: 2.0 mils b. Double coat: 4.0 mils

2. Paint shall be dry before handling or loading steelwork for shipment.

D. Field Touch-Up: After erection clean and paint as described in shop coat: 1. All damaged areas of shop coat. 2. Exposed surfaces of bolts. 3. Bolt heads, nuts and washers. 4. All field welds and unpainted areas adjacent to field welds.


A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.

END OF SECTION

05400 - 1

SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior load-bearing wall framing. 2. Ceiling joist framing. 3. Gypsum sheathing and air-infiltration barriers.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. 2. Section 09110 - Non-load-bearing Metal Framing-for interior non-load-bearing

metal stud assemblies.

C. Products installed but not furnished in this section: 1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications 2. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A653 - Steel Coding. 2. ASTM A570 - Hot-rolled Sheet Steel. 3. ASTM A611 - Cold-rolled Sheet Steel. 4. ASTM A792 - Aluminum-Zinc-Coated Sheet Steel. 5. ASTM C955 - Steel Studs. 6. ASTM A36 - Zinc-Coated Hot-Dip Steel. 7. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement Grout.

B. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members:

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures B. Product data for each type of cold-formed metal framing, accessory, and product

specified, clearly indicating all dimensions, gauges, and proposed locations. C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-

formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

D. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer indicating steel sheet complies with

requirements.

05400 - 2

E. Welding Certificates: Signed by contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the “Quality Assurance” article.


A. General: Design of steel-stud framing elements is the responsibility of the contractor. Framing studs, tracks, bracing, connections, furring, and related elements are shown on the drawings for dimensional purposes and to show assumptions used in the design of the primary building structure. 1. Connections to the primary building structure are to be designed and detailed

to prevent localized overstress, torsion overstress and deflection due to torsion of the primary building structure elements.

B. Structural Performance: Framing systems and connection are required to be

capable of withstanding the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Design Loads: a. Dead Loads. b. Snow Load. c. Wind and Seismic Loads. 2. Deflection Limits:

a. Vertifical Deflection: 1/600 of the span for brick veneer; 1/360 of the span for all other conditions.

b. Horizontal Deflection: 1/360 of the wall height, and/or opening width. 3. Sideway (Story Drift): a. Provide steel stud framing, including anchorage, capable of

withstanding the maximum story drift of the Code. 4. Design Framing System: a. To maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerance

and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

i. Floor Deflections: Upward and downward movement of span/360. ii. Roof Deflections: Upward and downward movement of span/240. b. To accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of

sheathing materials, or brick veneer.

C. Physical and Structural Properties: C-studs with minimum yield of 33,000 PSI (18 and 20 gage), and 50,000 PSI (12, 14, and16 gage). Structural performance and spacings as required by shop drawing design/build documents.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.

05400 - 3

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code--Steel”, and AWS D1.3, “Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel”.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated assemblies are

indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that tested as part of an assembly for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI’s “Specification for the Design of Cold-

Formed Steel Structural Members”.

F. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, shop drawings and other structural data.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate

to avoid condensation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing by one of the following:

1. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 2. Scafco Corp. 3. Steeler, Inc. 4. Or Approved Equal 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, zinc coated.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A570/A570M, hot rolled or ASTM A611, cold rolled; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer’s baked-on, lead- and chromate-free, rust-inhibitive primer complying with performance requirements.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A792/A792M, structural steel, 55 percent aluminum-zinc-alloy

coated. 2.03 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C955.

05400 - 4

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, oversized to allow full bearing of studs, complying with ASTM C955.

2.04 NON-LOAD-BEARING CURTAIN-WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufactuer’s standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C955.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths

indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C955.

C. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer’s single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads.

D. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer’s double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks,

consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

E. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer’s standard clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure.

2.05 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer’s standard thickness and configuration,

unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 ANCHORS, CLIPS AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A123.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade, threaded carbon-steel bolts and carbon-steel

nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers.

C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel

drill screws.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint.

05400 - 5

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I; and clean, natural sand.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining

grout contained selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's recommendations and requirements.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery,

and erections stresses.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet.


A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

3.04 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C1007, unless more stringent

requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line,

and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer’s written recommendations and requirements.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are

indicated for track or tension members.

05400 - 6

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.

Independently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

3.05 NONLOAD-BEARING PARTITION INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Fasten both flanges of

studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as noted on plans.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb

walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Where gypsum wallboard is omitted from one or both sides of partitions, install horizontal bridging, spaced in rows not more than 30 inches (762 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

3.06 JOIST INSTALLATION

A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists.

B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce.

C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls.

D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track,

nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.

E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated.

F. Install bridging at each end of joists and at intervals indicated.

G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom

flange.

H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.

05400 - 7


A. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.

3.08 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

E. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and the manufacturer's instructions.

F. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust

spots on fabricated and installed prime-painted, cold-formed metal framing.

C. Protect paper-surfaced gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more than 30 days by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with a securely fastened air-infiltration barrier.

D. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or

by applying tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at time sheathing is applied.

E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to

manufacturer and installer.

END OF SECTION

05500 - 1

SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS


A. Section Includes: 1. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized and prime painted as required

and as scheduled, including A. Steel Stairs B. Guard Railing C. Hand Railing D. Bollards E. Miscellaneous steel items


1. Section 01400 - Quality Control. 2. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. 3. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. 4. Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish.

C. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under this Section:

1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A572 - Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A53 - Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. 3. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 4. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 5. ASTM A386 - Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. 6. ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural

Tubing in Round and Shapes.

B. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):

1. SSPC Painting Manual, Volume II, Systems and Specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturers specifications and installation instructions for all

05500 - 2

prefabricated items.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and

type of fasteners, and accessories. 2. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols.

Indicate net weld lengths. 4. Provide structural calculations, stamped by a Registered Professional Engineer

in the State of Oregon, for the design of steel stairs and supporting elements (including columns and footings), guard railing, hand railing and all attachments and supports.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A572.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

C. Plates: ASTM A36.

D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40, unless otherwise noted.

E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.

F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.

G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc rich type.

H. Non-Metallic, Non-Shrink Grout: Corps of Engineers CRD-C588, Non-Metallic Grout and Burke Conc. Accessories, Inc., Sealtight 588 by W.R. Meadows, Inc., Masterflow by Master Builders, Sonogrout by Sonneborn, Thoroset by Thoro System Products, Five Star Grout by U.S. Grout Corp., Upcon by Bostik, or equal.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Verify dimensions on jobsite prior to shop fabrication.

B. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to Site.

C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

D. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.

05500 - 3

E. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively

located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.

G. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and

related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.

C. Shop prime all exposed and concealed interior steel members.

D. Shop galvanize all exposed exterior steel, after fabrication to a minimum 2.0 oz/sq. ft zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A386.



B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate sections.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.

D. Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not

scheduled. E. After erection prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed galvanized,

05500 - 4

except for surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.05 SCHEDULE

A. The following schedule is list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled.

B. Connection: Fabricate of welded construction, drill and tap as required to receive

hardware and similar items. Include required anchors for building into other work.

C. Structural Connectors: Furnish custom fabricated bolts, plates, tie rods, anchors, dowels, and other steel shapes for framing, supporting, and anchoring framing.

D. Loose Bearing Plates: Provide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete as

indicated. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts.

E. Roof Access Ladder: Steel, of 3/8 x 2 side rails spaced at 20 inches; rungs of one inch diameter solid rod spaced 12 inches on center; space rungs 7 inches from wall surface; with steel mounting brackets and attachments; galvanized finish.

END OF SECTION

06112 - 1

SECTION 06112 FRAMING AND SHEATHING


A. Section Includes: 1. Wall and roof sheathing. 2. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. 3. Telephone and electrical panel boards. 4. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories and fire

stopping.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07210 - Building Insulation. 2. Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Metal Framing. 3. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum Sheathing. 4. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories.

C. Products Furnished but Not Installed Under This Section:

1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of steel fabrications embedded or bearing upon and anchored into concrete and masonry.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC): 1. ALSC softwood Lumber Standards.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard. 2. ANSI/AHA A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.

C. American Plywood Association (APA). D. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA):

1. AWPA C1 - All Timber Products Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. 2. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process.

E. National Forest Products Association (NFPA).

F. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).

1. WCLIB...Grading and Dressing Rules No. 16.

G. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 1. WWPA...Grading Western Lumber.


A. Perform Work in accordance with following agencies:

06112 - 2

1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.


A. Deliver products to Site, store, protect, and handle under provisions of Section 01600. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Provide structural wood materials with grade stamps of WCLIB or WWPA, and as modified herein. 1. All lumber shall be free of noticeable warp or twist, with less than 5% showing

"very light" warp, twist, bow, cup or crook per Rule 16. 2. Seal end grain of material prior to delivery to Project Site.

B. Provide material with maximum moisture content 19% for all joists, studs, blocking,

ledgers and beams. Contractor's option: air dried or KD.

C. Provide all blocking, sill plates, and nailers in contact with concrete, at or near grade or exposed to weather: Coast region Douglas Fir, Construction or No. 2, KD, WCLIB, S4S, pressure treated per Fed. Spec. TT-W-571.

D. Light Framing Lumber: Douglas Fir-Larch, S4S, No. 2 and better.

E. Structural Joists: Douglas Fir-Larch, No. 2 and better, S4S, except as noted otherwise on Drawings.

F. Beams: Douglas Fir-Larch, No. 1, S4S, except as noted otherwise on Drawings. G. Studs: Douglas Fir-Larch, No. 2 and better.

H. Softwood Plywood: APA Rated Sheathing Structural II or CDX exterior with exterior

glue. 1. Sheathing: ¼” CDX; P.I. 48/24, T & G on long side,) ¾” CDX; P.I. 24/0 5 ply ½”

CDX; P.I. 24/0. 2. No OSB board will be allowed.

H. Gypsum Sheathing: Refer to Section 09250.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: Zinc electroplated steel for high humidity at treated wood locations;

use stainless steel only; unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three

times thickness of sheathing. 3. Anchors: ASTM A307; Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid

06112 - 3

masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel.

B. Die Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel.

C. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions, except at treated wood use stainless steel, Simpson, or approved substitute.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING

A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position.

B. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Place horizontal members flat, crown side up.

D. Construct load bearing framing and curb members full length without splices.

E. Double members at openings over 24 inches wide. Space short studs over and under

opening to stud spacing.

F. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists. Frame rigidly into joists.

G. Bridge joists in excess of 8 feet span at mid-span. Fit solid blocking at ends of

members.

H. Place sill gasket directly on cementitious foundation. Puncture gasket clean and fit tight to protruding foundation anchor bolts.

I. Coordinate installation of wood chord metal joists, glue laminated structural units,

prefabricated wood trusses, and plywood web joists.

J. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members.

K. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings.

3.02 SHEATHING

A. Secure roof sheathing perpendicular to framing members with ends staggered and sheet ends over firm bearing.

B. Secure wall sheathing with long dimension parallel to wall studs, with ends over firm

bearing.

C. Place building paper horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lap edges and ends.

06112 - 4

D. Install plywood to multiple span feasible. E. Install telephone and electrical panel boards with plywood sheathing material where

required. Over size the panel by 12 inches on all sides. 3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum treatment.

END OF SECTION

06180 - 1

SECTION 06180 GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS


A. Section Includes: 1. Glue laminated wood beams. 2. Steel hardware and attachment brackets.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Prefabricated steel structural supports. 2. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Roof sheathing. 3. Section 06193 - Fabricated Wood Trusses

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC).

B. American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC): 1. ALSC Softwood Lumber Standards.

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A190.1 - Structural Glued Laminated Timber. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Galvanized) coatings on Products Fabricated from

Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. 3. ASTM D2559 - Adhesives for Structural Laminated Wood Products for Use

Under Exterior (Wet Use) Exposure Conditions.

E. American Wood Preservers' Association (AWPA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers,

bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing and framed openings.

C. Furnish to Architect AITC "Certificate of Performance" with any attachments executed. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural units with three years minimum experience, and certified by AITC.

B. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in erection of glue laminated structural

06180 - 2

units with three years documented experience, and approved by manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, and other load criteria.

D. Each member to be stamped with the AITC quality inspected stamp.



B. Protect members in accordance with AITC requirements for load wrapped material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Lumber: Douglas Fir - Larch Industrial Grade lumber. Design for following values: 1. See Structural General notes. 2. F.R.P. Glu Lams are not allowed.

B. Accessories:

1. Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A36; weldable quality, prime painted SSPC Paint 15, Type I, red oxide.

2. Hardware: ASTM A307, structural quality steel. 3. Adhesive: ASTM D2559 for wet condition of service.

2.02 FABRICATION:

A. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication. B. Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with Contract Documents,

reviewed Shop Drawings, and AITC industrial grade.

1. Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. 2. Fabricate member with camber built in. Where camber is not noted, provide

standard 2,000 foot radius camber for simple span conditions. 3. Do not splice or join members in locations other than that indicated, without

permission.

C. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground smooth.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Verify that supports are ready to receive work.

B. Verify sufficient end bearing area.

06180 - 3

C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate placement of support items. 3.03 ERECTION

A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions.

B. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently secured.

C. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or any other unauthorized

modification. 3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position.

END OF SECTION

06193 - 1

SECTION 06193 FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES


A. Section Includes: 1. Prefabricated wood trusses for roof framing. 2. Bridging, Bracing, and anchorage.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Roof sheathing. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. NFPA - National Forest Products Association.

B. TPI - Truss Plate Institute.

C. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.


A. Any attachments or materials requirements for the performance of the trusses not shown on the Drawings is the responsibility of the truss manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of prefabricated wood trusses with three years minimum experience.

C. Design trusses under direct supervision of professional engineer experienced in structural framing design of trusses registered in the jurisdiction.

D. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by BCLIB.

E. Truss Plates: In accordance with Truss Plate Institute.

1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable Code for loads, seismic zoning, and other governing load criteria

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals are to be stamped and signed by a structural engineer registered in the state in which the project is located. Provide ICBO approval report or ICBO approved catalog for all items to be furnished. Products lacking such approval will not be accepted, unless accompanied by full design information and certification by a registered structural engineer that they are appropriate for the conditions of this project.

06193 - 2

B. Indicate framing system, sizes and pacing of joints, loads and joist cambers, bearing and anchor details bridging and bracing, framed openings, and design calculations.

C. Submit along with shop drawings certification by an officer of the fabricating firm, indicating trusses comply with all project requirements, and that product will sustain all required design loading.

D. Engineering design considerations are fabricator’s responsibility.

E. Shop drawings shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to fabrication. Do not fabricate and/or deliver any materials to jobsite until receipt of shop drawings acceptance by Architect.


A. Deliver products to site.

B. Transport and store trusses in vertical position resting on bearing ends.

C. Protect trusses from moisture, warpage, and distortion during transit and when stored as recommended by the truss manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Total Vertical Snow Load: 25 psf, minimum.

B. Apply wind and seismic loads as indicated on the structural drawings.

C. Apply perpendicular Wind Load 95 MPH Exposure ‘B’

D. Total Combined Live and Deal Load Deflection: L/240 of span.

E. Total Live Load Deflection: L/360 of span.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Lumber grading Rules: Douglas Fir S4S.

B. Steel Connectors: ASTM A 446 steel, Grade A, G60 galvanized, not less than 0.036 inch thickness. Metal plates must be tested and approved for 1 hour ceiling rated truss gypsum wall board assembly.

C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit condition.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication

B. Cut members accurately to length to achieve tight joint connections.

06193 - 3

C. Jig trusses during fabrication to assure accurate configuration.

D. Build camber into truss.

E. Fabricate and install trusses with bottom chord level and true within 1/8 inch per 12 feet.

F. Connector locations: Within ¼ inch of approved shop drawing location.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Check all lines and levels, verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.

B. Verify sufficient end bearing area.

C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. The trusses if stored prior to erection shall be stored in a vertical position and protected from the weather, and be handled with care to avoid any damage. Trusses not so protected or damaged may be rejected by Architect.

B. Install trusses in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, at a spacing of 24 inches oc.

C. Place trusses true to line and level.

D. This contractor will be held responsible for correctness of framing and all expenses incurred by alteration due to error in laying out.

E. Provide temporary bracing to hold trusses in place until permanently secured.

F. Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain trusses straight and in correct position before inducing loads.

G. Do not field cut trusses.

H. Design, provide and maintain all necessary temporary rigging, shoring and bracing, in place, until such time as members are permanently anchored to structure.

I. Temporary construction loads greater than design limits are not permitted.

J. Erection bracing in addition to required bridging is to be provided as required to keep trusses straight and plumb as required and to assure lateral support for the individual trusses and entire system until the sheathing material has been applied.

K. Workmen are not to be on trusses until they are braced per truss manufacturer’s recommendations or the plywood sheathing is installed.

06193 - 4

L. Place headers and supports to frame openings required.

M. Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this Section.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: ½ inch maximum from true position.

END OF SECTION

06200 - 1

SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY


A. Work Included: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, services, etc. necessary for completion of all finish carpentry and woodwork indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. Types of finish carpentry and woodwork include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Exterior plywood. 2. Hanging doors. 3. Installation of finish hardware. 4. Installation of toilet accessories.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry 2. Section 08210 - Wood Doors and Frames 3. Section 08700 - Finish Hardware 4. Section 09900 - Painting

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 45 days after Contractor's receipt of Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Manufacturer's printed product information, including specifications, standard

colors, and installation instructions; five (5) copies. 1.03 GUARANTEE

A. Per Section 01700; twelve (12) months. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards: 1. The Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) apply

and by reference are made part of this Specification. All reference to "Premium, Custom, or Economy" grades in this Section shall be as defined in the latest edition of the AWI "Quality Standards".

2. All items not given a specific quality grade shall be Custom grade.

B. Competence: Installers of this work shall be fully-experienced and fully-skilled finish carpenters only.


A. Protection: Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration.

B. Delivery of Materials: Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and

06200 - 2

similar operations which would damage, soil, or otherwise harm woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas which meet the requirements specified for installation areas.


A. Temperature Control: Advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork installation areas. Do not install woodwork until the required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized in installation areas.

B. Tolerance: Maintain temperature and relative humidity as required for a tolerance of

plus or minus one percent (1%) of the specified optimum moisture content until woodwork receives specified finishes. Maintain temperature and humidity conditions until acceptance of the work by the Owner.

C. Protection: Protect installed woodwork from damage by other trades until Owner's

acceptance of the work. Advise Contractor of required protection procedures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Grade Stamps: Display grade mark and trademark of the association having jurisdiction on all pieces of wood. Omit marking of exposed surfaces and supply certificate of inspection for all pieces to receive transparent surfaces.

B. Maximum moisture content:

1. Finish lumber: 12% 2. Plywood: 15% 3. Hardwood: 9%

C. Fire-retardant treatment (where indicated on Drawings):

1. Interior: Dricon, Osmose, or approved equal. 2. Exterior: Koppers NCX, or approved equal. 3. Pressure-treat before milling, and bearing FR-S stamp of certification.

D. Quality Standards: AWI Sections 100 Grade I except as modified herein, and 200.

E. Kerf, groove, or route the backs of wide, flat members, including siding of 8 inch width

or larger.

F. Interior Wood: 1. Douglas Fir, Hem Fir, Pine; Grade 'B' and better, vertical grain.

2.02 FASTENERS

A. Siding Nails: W.H. Maze Co. "double hot dip" zinc-coated 6d ring shank siding nails of length to penetrate 1-1/2 inches minimum into stud. Stainless steel or aluminum ring-

06200 - 3

shanked siding nails are acceptable. Ordinary galvanized steel nails are not acceptable for siding applications.

B. Interior and Trim: Finish or casing nails. Other nails shall be standard types suitable

for the purpose. Where exposed, nails shall be hot dip galvanized or aluminum.

C. Screws: As detailed. Corrosion resistant, Phillips head. 2.03 MEMBRANES

A. Building paper: Federal Specification UU-B-790a, kraft; "Sisalkraft" Orange Label, "Burke" VaporSeal Brownskin, or approved equal.

B. Felt: 15 pound asphalt-saturated inorganic, unperforated felt.

2.04 ADHESIVES

A. As recommended by paneling manufacturer. 2.05 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and subject to review by the Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Examine all areas and conditions under which this work will be performed, and verify that all such work is complete to the point that this installation may begin. Report all inadequate conditions to the Contractor. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Start of work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Measurements: Before proceeding with woodwork required to be fitted to other

construction, obtain measurements and verify dimensions with all Shop Drawings details as required for accurate fit.

C. Preparation: Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas prior to installing. Backprime woodwork on all surfaces which will be concealed with one coat of wood primer. Schedule delivery to allow time for application and drying of backprime coat before installation of woodwork.

D. Install building paper or felt underlayment in a weatherlap fashion prior to installation

of exterior plywood or board sidings, and where shown at other locations in the Drawings.

3.02 GENERAL

A. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details shown.

06200 - 4

B. Install all items straight, true, level, plumb, and firmly anchored in place. Where

blocking or backing is required, coordinate as necessary with other trades to ensure placement of blocking and backing in a timely manner.

C. Install this work with dry, tight, and well-nailed joints, assembled to conceal

shrinkage. Miter all exterior corners; cope all interior corners; miter or scarf all end-to-end joints; miter and return all exposed ends.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF DOORS

A. Install wood doors and frames with double wedge blocking back of jambs at butts, lock strikes, and nailing points. Fit all wood doors accurately to their frames with an even margin at head and jambs with proper clearance threshold to clear the indicated floor coverings. As required during progress of the work, remove and reset doors and hardware for the installation of work of other trades.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE

A. Install all finish hardware in accordance with the "Hardware Schedule" described in Division 8 of these Specifications and in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, set all finish hardware at the heights required by access codes.


A. Install all accessories in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, taking special care to install firmly and securely with all anchors drawn up tight.

3.06 FINISHING

A. Provide exterior materials sufficiently early in the construction period for backpriming and/or matching finishing by others, so that installation is not delayed.

B. Interior Work:

1. Sandpaper all finished wood surfaces thoroughly as required to produce a uniformly smooth surface, always sanding in direction of the wood grain. No course grained sandpaper marks, sander waves, hammer marks, or other imperfections shall be permitted.

2. Fill all nail holes at interior work with stainable material matching the species of wood installed.

3.07 CLEAN-UP

A. During progress of work, do not allow the accumulation of debris or scrap resulting from this work. Immediately clean and repair sills or damage caused by this work to work of other trades.

B. Upon completion remove all resulting tools, surplus materials and rubbish, and leave

entire installation in clean condition.

06200 - 5

END OF SECTION

06400 - 1

SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK


A. Section Includes: 1. Architectural woodwork (mill fabricated as required for complete Project as

indicated, including installation.)

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit large scale drawings indicating materials, component profiles, fastening jointing, details, finishes, accessories, and dimensions when noted on shop drawing matrix.


A. Architectural Woodwork Shall: Conform to American Woodwork Institute (AWI). Quality shall be Commercial Custom Grade.

B. Experience and Qualifications: Millwork fabricator to have minimum five years

successful experience in fabricating, finishing and installing Custom Grade architectural woodwork as specified. 1. Provide sufficient mechanics skilled in architectural woodwork to produce

premium quality product. 2. Upon request, provide information necessary to demonstrate successful

experience in producing premium quality architectural woodwork.

C. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Shall comply with ANSI A208.2 and ASTM e84 Class C (111) fire rating (76-200).

D. Plastic Laminate shall: Conform to the National Electrical Manufacturers Association

(NEMA) LD#. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Lumber and Plywood: Graded in accordance with referenced standard for quality assurance: thickness indicated of Drawings. 1. Paneling: Provide fire-retardant treated core with flame spread rating of

maximum 25 (ASTM E84): treatment which does not cause stains in finished system.

06400 - 2

B. MDF: Medium Density Fiberboard. C. Plastic Laminate: colors and textures as selected by Tenant.

D. Casework Hardware: as selected by Tenant. 2.02 FABRICATION

A. Shop assemble architectural woodwork in sizes easily handles and to ensure passage through building openings.

B. Shop fabricate and finish architectural woodwork to maximum extent possible

allowing for shipping, handling, and access to final location of installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Plastic Laminates: Apply in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes, make corners and joints hairline, slightly bevel arises, locate butt joints minimum 2’ – 0” from cutouts.

B. Use exposed fastening devices only when approved in advance and only when

unavoidable: Arrange neatly. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install under supervision of factory trained mechanics in conformance with referenced standards.

B. Provide cutouts and clearances for inserts, outlet boxes, and other fixtures. Prime

paint contact surfaces of cutouts, using clear material on members having transparent finishes.

C. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.

D. Securely anchor architectural woodwork to blocking in wall, plumb and level.

E. Carefully scribe cabinet work which is against other building materials, leaving gaps

of 1/32” maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim.

F. After installation, adjust hardware.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 06651 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS

PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following horizontal and trim solid surface product types:

1. Countertops with sinks

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for Blocking.

1.3 DEFINITION A. Solid surface is defined as nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the

same composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data: 1. For each type of product indicated. 2. Product data for the following:

a. Restroom Countertop with integral lavatory. B. Shop drawings:

1. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices and other components.

a. Show full-size details, edge details, thermoforming requirements, attachments, etc.

b. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

c. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, waste receptacle and other items installed in solid surface.

C. Product data: 1. Indicate product description, fabrication information and compliance

with specified performance requirements. D. Product certificates: E. Fabricator/installer qualifications:

1. Provide copy of certification number. F. Manufacturer certificates:

1. Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements. G. Maintenance data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning instructions.

a. Maintenance kit for finishes shall be submitted. 2. Include in project closeout documents.


A. Qualifications: 1. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products

similar to those required for this project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Fabricator/installer qualifications: 1. Work of this section shall be by a certified fabricator/installer, certified

in writing by the manufacturer. C. Applicable standards:

1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein: a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) d. NSF International

2. Fire test response characteristics: a. Provide with the following Class A (Class I) surface burning

characteristics as determined by testing identical products per UL 723 (ASTM E84) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.

D. Coordination drawings: 1. Shall be prepared indicating:

a. Plumbing work. b. Electrical work. c. Miscellaneous steel for the general work. d. Indicate location of all walls (rated and non-rated), blocking

locations and recessed wall items, etc. 2. Content:

a. Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. b. Do not base coordination drawings on reproductions of the

contract documents or standard printed data. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the contract drawings and make

specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements.

d. Provide alternate sketches to designer for resolution of such conflicts.

1) Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the contract.

E. Drawings shall: 1. Be produced in 1/2-inch scale for all fabricated items.

F. Drawings must be complete and submitted to the architect within 60 days after award of contract for record only.

1. No review or approval will be forthcoming. 2. Coordination drawings are required for the benefit of contractor’s

fabricators/installers as an aid to coordination of their work so as to eliminate or reduce conflicts that may arise during the installation of their work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation.

B. Store components indoors prior to installation. C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces.

1. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s warranty against defects in materials. 1. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective

materials. 2. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage from

excessive heat will not be warranted. 3. Warranty shall be transferable to subsequent owner for remainder of

warranty period. B. Optional Installed Warranty:

1. To qualify for the optional Installed Warranty, fabrication and installation must be performed by a DuPont Certified Fabrication/Installation source who will provide a brand plate for the application.

2. This warranty covers all fabrication and installation performed by the certified/approved source subject to the specific wording contained in the Installed Warranty Card.

C. Manufacturer’s warranty period: 1. Ten years from date of substantial completion.

1.8 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance requirements as specified by the manufacturer.

PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following: a. Corian® surfaces from the DuPont company (basis of design). b. Insert manufacturer’s name.

SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS — continued c. Insert manufacturer’s name. b.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Solid polymer components

1. Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, having minimum physical and performance properties specified.

2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch (.25 mm) shall be repairable by sanding and/or polishing.

B. Thickness: 1 1/2 inch

C. Edge treatment: 1. Standard eased edges

E. Integral sink: 1. Model number:

a.830 [ADD C] 2. Color:

a. Silver Gray [ADD C] 3. Mounting:

a. Seamed undermount.

G. Backsplash: 1. Applied. 2. Coved.

H. Sidesplash: 1. Applied. 2. Coved.

I. Performance characteristics: Property Typical Result Test Tensile Strength 6,000 psi ASTM D 638 Tensile Modulus 1.5 x 10-6 psi ASTM D 638 Tensile Elongation 0.4% min. ASTM D 638 Flexural Strength 10,000 psi ASTM D 790 Flexural Modulus 1.2 x 10-6 psi ASTM D 790 Hardness >85 Rockwell “M” Scale

ASTM D 785 56 Barcol

Impressor ASTM D 2583

Thermal Expansion 3.02 x 10-5 in./in./°C ASTM D 696 (1.80 x 10-5 in./in./°F)

Gloss (60° Gardner) 5–75 (matte—highly polished) ANSI Z124 Light Resistance (Xenon Arc) No effect NEMA LD 3-2000

Method 3.3 Wear and Cleanability Passes ANSI Z124.3 & Z124.6 Stain Resistance: Sheets Passes ANSI Z124.3 & Z124.6 Fungus and Bacteria Resistance Does not support microbial growth ASTM G21&G22 Boiling Water Resistance No visible change NEMA LD 3-2000 Method 3.5 High Temperature Resistance No change NEMA LD 3-2000

Method 3.6 Izod Impact 0.28 ft.-lbs./in. of notch ASTM D 256 (Notched Specimen) (Method A) Ball Impact No fracture—1⁄2 lb. ball: NEMA LD 3-2000

Resistance: Sheets 1⁄4" slab—36" drop Method 3.8 1⁄2" slab—144" drop

Weatherability ∆E*94<5 in 1,000 hrs. ASTM G 155 Specific Gravity † 1.7 Water Absorption Long-term ASTM D 570

0.4% (3⁄4") 0.6% (1⁄2") 0.8% (1⁄4")

Toxicity 99 (solid colors) Pittsburgh Protocol

66 (patterned colors) Test (“LC50”Test)

Flammability All colors ASTM E 84, (Class I and Class A) NFPA 255 &

UL 723 Flame Spread Index <25 Smoke Developed Index <25 † Approximate weight per square foot: 1⁄4" (6 mm) 2.2 lbs., 1⁄2" (12.3 mm) 4.4 lbs. Shapes meet or exceed the ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI Z124.6 standards for plastic sinks and lavatories. NEMA results based on the NEMA LD 3-2000 W 2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint adhesive: 1. Manufacturer’s standard one- or two-part adhesive kit to create

inconspicuous, nonporous joints. B. Sealant:

1. Manufacturer’s standard mildew-resistant, FDA-compliant, NSF 51-compliant (food zone — any type), UL-listed silicone sealant in colors matching components.

C. Conductive tape: 1. Manufacturer’s standard aluminum foil tape, with required thickness,

for use with cutouts near heat sources. D. Insulating felt tape:

1. Manufacturer’s standard for use with conductive tape in insulating solid surface material from adjacent heat source.

2.4 FACTORY FABRICATION

A. Shop assembly 1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes

indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer’s printed instructions and technical bulletins.

2. Form joints between components using manufacturer’s standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joints.

a. Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, 2" wide. 3. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as

indicated on the drawings. 4. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns.

a. Rout cutouts, radii and contours to template. b. Smooth edges.

c. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work.

2.5 FINISHES A. Select from the manufacturer’s standard color chart.

1. Color: Aqualite B. Finish:

1. Provide surfaces with a uniform finish: Matte; gloss range of 5–20.

PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data.

1. Provide product in the largest pieces available. 2. Form field joints using manufacturer’s recommended adhesive, with

joints inconspicuous in finished work. a. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed. 3. Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 1

inch on either side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top.

4. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 5. Rout radii and contours to template. 6. Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports. 7. Align adjacent countertops and form seams to comply with

manufacturer’s written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop.

8. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface.

9. Install countertops with no more than 1/8-inch (3 mm) sag, bow or other variation from a straight line.

B. Coved backsplashes and applied sidesplashes: 1. Install applied sidesplashes using manufacturer’s standard color-

matched silicone sealant. 2. Adhere applied sidesplashes to countertops using manufacturer’s

standard color-matched silicone sealant. C. Coved backsplashes and sidesplashes:

1. Provide coved backsplashes and sidesplashes at all walls and adjacent millwork.

2. Fabricate radius cove at intersection of counters with backsplashes to dimensions shown on the drawings.

3. Adhere to countertops using manufacturer’s standard color-matched Joint Adhesive.

E. Integral sinks/vanities: 1. Provide solid surface materials bowls and/or lavatories sinks with

overflows in locations shown on the drawings.

2. Secure sinks and lavatory bowls to tops using manufacturer’s recommended sealant, adhesive and mounting hardware to maintain warranty.

WRIT 3.3 REPAIR

A. Repair or replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to architect’s satisfaction.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Keep components clean during installation. B. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains.

End of Section

07120 - 1

SECTION 07120 FLUID APPLIED ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING


A. Section Includes: 1. Fluid applied fill coat and elastomeric finish waterproofing as indicated on

drawings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04100 - Mortar: Mortar joints. 2. Section 04220 - Unit Masonry: Concrete masonry units. 3. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM G26 - Recommended practice for operating light exposure apparatus. 2. ASTM 1653 - Test method for permeability. 3. ASTM E96 - Test method for water vapor transmission of materials.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 and 01400.

B. Sample/Mock-up: 1. Submit two (2) wall samples of each color 6" x 6" in size indicating texture, color

and finish. 2. Provide field sample/mock-up for color approval by Architect.


A. Applicator: Company specializing in application of specified waterproofing with three years minimum experience, and approved by manufacturer.

B. Comply with applicable recommendations of the manufacturer.

C. Field Sample/Mock-up:

1. Provide 100 sq. ft. of field sample of installed membrane over CMU wall under provisions of Section 01400.

2. Field sample shall represent color and surfaces of finished work. 3. Contractor shall coordinate inspection of the field sample by the local

manufacturers representative for approval prior to proceeding. 4. Approved sample may be incorporated as part of work.


A. Comply with manufacturers recommendations on environmental requirements for storage, handling and installation.

07120 - 2

B. Ambient Temperature Minimum of 50 F. air and surface temperature for 24 hours

before, during and 24 hours after application, unless otherwise specified by coating manufacturer.

C. No precipitation for 24 hours preceding or predicted for 24 hours after application.

D. The following conditions may require dampening the surface prior to and during

application: 1. Wind-caused rapid drying of surface. 2. Excessive surface temperature. 3. Excessive air temperature. 4. Direct sun. 5. Low humidity.

E. Surfaces shall be protected to prevent rapid drying where heavy wind or hot sun exist.

F. Rapid changes in temperature should be avoided during curing to prevent thermal

shock cracks in finish materials.

G. Surface temperature shall be maintained above 50 F. throughout application and curing of blockfiller system.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. All manufactured materials shall be delivered in their original packages, containers and bundles bearing the name of manufacturer and brand. Store all materials off the ground under watertight cover and away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces until ready for use. Damaged or deteriorated materials must be removed from the premises immediately.

1.07 PROTECTION

A. During application of fill coat and elastomeric finish, protect work of other trades against undue soilage and damage by the exercise of reasonable care and precaution. Repair and/or replace any work so damaged or soiled as to be unsightly in Architect's judgment at no additional cost to Owner or Contact.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Warranty: Include coverage of materials and installation and resultant damage from failure of installation to resist penetration of moisture.

1.09 PRE-APPLICATION MEETING

A. General Contractor shall arrange meeting no less than three (3) days prior to starting

work. B. Attendance:

1. General Contractor.

07120 - 3

2. Coating Subcontractor. 3. Representative of coating manufacturer.

C. Meeting Agenda:

1. Substrate condition; 2. Sequence and method of application of coating system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Fluid Applied Waterproofing Manufacturers: 1. Thoro System Products.

B. Substitutions: No substitutions will be allowed. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Fill Coat: Cementitious, acrylic-modified waterproof blockfiller. Super Quickseal with Thorosheen, as manufactured by Thoro System Products.

B. Finish Coat: Acrylic polymer elastomeric waterproof coating. Thorolastic, as

manufactured by Thoro System Products. Custom colors shall be as indicated on the drawings and within Section 09900 - Painting or as selected by the Architect. Performance Requirements: 1. Elongation: Minimum at break 400% 2. Weathering (ASTM G 26 Xenon Arc) 5000 hours 3. Permeability (ASTM D 1653, E 96) 12 perms 4. Freeze/thaw (DOT Method A) 50 cycles

5. Flexibility (Fed. Test 141,6221) no change PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP

A. In cold and/or inclement weather, no work shall be started until area is adequately covered temporarily, so that a surface temperature of not less than 50 F. can be maintained during and up to completion of the drying process. Temporary heat shall be provided for, when necessary, as directed by the manufacturer. The use of portable space heaters to provide temporary heat is permitted.

B. Surfaces shall be free of defects such as mortar or grout droppings, laitance, dirt, dust,

grease, form release treatments, efflorescence, curing compounds, paint and any other foreign materials.

C. Finish coat shall be of uniform color, texture and sheen, free from runs, drips, curtains,

holidays, shiners and other imperfections.

07120 - 4

3.02 MIXING

A. Mix in strict accord with printed instructions of manufacturer. Mechanical mixers of an approved type shall be used for mixing. Frozen, caked or lumped materials shall not be used. Mechanical mixers and containers shall be cleaned after mixing; each batch kept free from previous mixes.

B. Thoroughly mix with proper amount of water until a creamy batter consistence is

achieved, with uniform color.

C. Let material set for fifteen (15) minutes, then temper back.

D. The material may be re-tempered only one more time.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Blockfiller: 1. Do not apply while wall is excessively wet. 2. Apply a heavy brush or roller coat to the surface at the rate of 100 sq. ft. per

gallon over flat face block, or approximately 75 sq. ft. per gallon over fluted or split face block, depending on the roughness of the block.

3. Using a wet and clean brush, work the fill coat in a horizontal manner to fill surface imperfections. Lay off base coat with vertical strokes. Backroll surface with 3/4" nap roller with downward finish strokes to remove brush marks. Do not let the material set or harden before backrolling.

4. Let the fill coat set for 24 hours. Apply a light fog spray of clean, potable water on the second day if conditions are hot and/or windy.

B. Finish Coat:

1. Stir thoroughly with a metal paddle or electric mixer to assure a complete, uniform dispersion throughout.

2. In extremely hot, dry weather slight dampening of the surface with clean water is acceptable prior to the application.

3. Apply the FIRST COAT according to the manufacturer's printed recommendations with texture to be determined by the Architect.

4. Apply the SECOND COAT according to the manufacturer's printed recommendations with color and texture to be determined by the Architect.

5. Finish product should have a dry film thickness of 18-20 dry mils pinhole free. 6. Apply base coat of smooth texture uniformly over entire surface. Then apply

second coat in the desired texture. 7. Clean equipment immediately after application is completed with clean water.

Dried film can be removed with xylonal. 8. Do not apply if surface temperature is below 40 F. or expected to fall below 40 F.

within 24 hours.

C. The following conditions may require dampening the surface prior to and during application: 1. Wind causing rapid drying of surface; 2. Hot surface temperature; 3. Hot air temperature; 4. Direct sun; 5. Low humidity.

07120 - 5

3.04 COMPLETION

A. Dry Film Thickness Inspection: 1. Measure coating upon completion of application, using precision instrument

designed for measuring coating dry film thickness. 2. Recoat any work measuring less than thickness specified by coating

manufacturer. 3. Touch-up test surface as recommended by coating manufacturer.

B. Final Cleaning:

1. Remove splattered coating from adjacent windows, doors, flashings, and concrete walkways, as recommended by coating manufacturer.

C. Manufacturers Letter of Completion:

1. Provide letter of completion and acceptance from the manufacturer verifying dry film thickness and application.

3.05 INSPECTION AND SCHEDULE

A. Contractor shall maintain schedule of application in field office for Architect's inspection.

END OF SECTION

07210 - 1

SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION


A. Section Includes: 1. Batt insulation, rigid insulation and vapor barrier at interior thermal walls. 4. Sound control insulation at interior walls.


1. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Supportive construction. 2. Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Metal Framing:

Supportive construction. 3. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 54 Division 15 - Mechanical: Piping and duct insulation.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame

Construction and Manufactured Housing.

B. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. FS HH-I-521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal, (Mineral Fiber for Ambient

Temperatures). 2. FS HH-I-558 - Insulation, Blocks, Boards, Blankets, Felts, Sleeving (Pipe and

Tube Covering), and Pipe Fitting Covering, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, Industrial Type).


A. Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements.

1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Batt Insulation Manufacturers: 1. Dow Chemical Co. 2. Owens Corning

3. Certainteed.

07210 - 2

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Thermal Batt Insulation: FS HH-I-521 Type I - without membranes or Type II - with non-reflective membrane one side, ASTM C665; preformed mineral fiber batt, conforming to following: 1. Thermal Resistance: R – 19. 2. Facing: FSK 25

B. Sound Control Insulation: FS HH-I-521 Type I - without membranes; mineral fiber batt,

friction fit, conforming to following: 1. 3-1/2" or 6" thick (fill stud space full depth of stud).

2. Facing: Unfaced. D. Vapor/Air Barrier: Barrier at walls: 1. Flame retardant polyethylene sheets 4 mil. minimum thickness. E. Rigid Wall Insulation: At interior masonry walls. 1. 1-1/2” Dow Styrofoam “Cavitymate Plus”, or equal 2. Thermal Resistance: R 7.5 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation and vapor barrier in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in spaces without gaps or voids.

C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids.

D. Install with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members.

E. Wall insulation: Staple or nail in place at maximum 6 inches oc.

F. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.

G. Extend vapor and air barrier tight to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other items interrupting the plane of membrane. Tape seal in place.

H. Install Sound Control Insulation at all framed demising walls. Extend insulation from floor to bottom of sheathing.

07210 - 3

END OF SECTION

07412 - 1

SECTION 07412 METAL ROOFING AND WALL CLADDING


A. Section Includes: 1. Roll form and press break formed sheet steel roof and wall panels as

indicated on Drawings and specified herein. 2. Flashings, closures, fasteners, and all trim required for a weatherproof

system.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Structure. 2. Section 07600 - Flashings and Sheet Metal: Wall Caps and Flashings. 3. Section 07900 - Sealants: Sealants.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/American Society for Testing and Materials (ANSI/ASTM): 1. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.


1. ASTM A361 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process for Roofing and Siding.

2. ASTM D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. NAAMM - Metal Finish Handbook.

D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 1. NRCA - Roofing Manual.

E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA):

1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Testing and Certification. 1. Wind Uplift: UL 580 test: Panels rated Class 90 with roof fastener clips

spaces 18" on center maximum (wide batten only) and 24" on center maximum (narrow batten only).

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings showing typical fastener layout and types of materials and accessories to be used. Include gauges, anchorage details, and

07412 - 2

details of panels at closures.

B. Office Sample: Submit three (3) 3"x5"samples of panel with finish color specified and a 12 inch long, full width sample of preformed panels showing lap and connection details. Include typical top and bottom edge trim, miter joint and fasteners. Obtain review from Architect prior to fabrication.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect against damage and discoloration.

B. Handle panels with non-marring slings.

C. Do not bend panels.

D. Store panels above ground, width one end elevated for drainage.

E. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces.

F. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry with clean cloth and allow to air dry.

G. Painted panels shall be shipped with plastic sheeting or a strippable film coating

between all panels.

H. Remove any strippable film coating prior to installation and in any case, do not allow the strippable film coating to remain on the panels in extreme heat, cold or in direct sunlight or other UV source.


A. Examine the conditions and substrates in which metal roofing work is to be installed. Substrate shall be installed leave, flat and true to avoid panel stresses.

B. Field measurements shall be taken prior to fabrication of panels.

C. Proceed with roofing installation only after satisfactory conditions are met.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide installers written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than five (5) years.

B. Provide manufacturer's written warranty for heavy coated steel sheets for a period of not less than twenty (20) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED FABRICATORS

A. Acceptable Fabricators:

07412 - 3

1. Carlisle Engineered Metal, Inc. 3. Custom-Bilt Metals 4. Pacific Metals

B. Substitutions are not allowed.

2.02 STEEL PANELS

A. 24 gauge ASTM A 792, Grade 40 steel with galvanized coating per ASTM A 792, A250.

B. Provide BHP Metals Profile Select Seam or Carlisle SA Panel with batten or seam as

indicated on drawings.

C. Roll form or press break with suitable protection to prevent chafing or fracture of the prefinished paint surface. Field measure prior to fabrication. Adjust individual pan widths to equalize areas rather than finishing with one odd sized sheet.

D. Panels shall be complete, continuous lengths. No panels shall be spliced together for

any reason. 2.03 FASTENERS

A. Concealed: Galvanized steel clips with plated screws. 2.04 SEALANTS

A. Vulkem urethane sealant, gun grade per federal specification TT-S-230c.

B. Clear silicone sealant, gun grade per federal specification TT-S-001543 A Type I.

2.05 FINISH A. Exterior finish of 0.2 mil thick corrosion-resistant primer and 0.8 mil thick finish coat of

Kynar 5007 for a total of 1.0 mil dry film thickness. 1. Color: (Choose one)

a. See drawings. Configuration: b. Narrow Batten: Roof panels shall consist of snap-on batten caps, 1/4”

wide and 1” high spaced 16-1/4" on center and a nominal panel width of the same. Panels shall be factory corrective leveled.

B. Accessories.

1. Fastener Clips: a. UL-90 assembly rated clip: 24 gauge steel coated with minimum G-60

Galvanized per ASTM A-525. 2. Fasteners:

a. Per manufacturer recommendation. 3. Sealant:

a. Gunnable Grade Caulking: Single component Urethane Caulk.

07412 - 4

b. Tape Sealant: Butyl. 4. Backer Rod: Locate neoprene backer rod at mid-span of each panel.

C. Flashing.

1. Material, gauge and finish to match panels. Do not use lead or copper. Remove any strippable film prior to installation.

D. Fabrication.

1. Unless otherwise shown on drawings or specified herein, fabricate panels in continuous one-piece lengths and fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths.

2. Roofing panels shall be factory formed. Field framed panels are not acceptable.

PART 3 - INSPECTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine substrate and conditions under which work is to be installed. Do not proceed with installation until satisfactory conditions have been corrected, and until acceptable framing tolerances have been achieved as determined by the manufacturer, supplier, and installer. Warping, buckling and other distortions within the finished metal roofing will not be acceptable.

B. Verify all field dimensions prior to fabrication.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's directions. B. Install 30# type felt paper to plywood roof sheathing prior to placement of metal roof

panels and associated flashings.

C. Install in continuous lengths and locations indicated on Drawings. Provide panel joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Panels shall only be fastened with concealed panel clips.

E. Install backer rod at mid span of panels. Stop rod 2' from each end of panels.

F. Align exposed fasteners and equally space by using shop pre-punch holes.

F. Seal panel joints with continuous sealant as required. Install entire assembly

weather-tight.

G. All exposed cut edges shall be touched up with material compatible and matching the color of the adjacent prefinished surface.

3.03 ADJUSTMENTS: Replace or repair and touch-up panels damaged or scratched prior

to Owner acceptance.

11 November 96 07412 - 5

END OF SECTION

07542 - 1

SECTION 07542

THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Mechanically fastened membrane roofing system. 2. Roof insulation. 3. Vapor retarder. 4. Substrate board.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for furnishing acoustical deck rib insulation. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 3. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck. 4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration

flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 5. Division 07 Section "Manufactured Roof Expansion Joints." 6. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 7. Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 “Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing”; glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual"; and the Roof Consultants Institute “Glossary of Roofing Terms” for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

B. Sheet Metal Terminology and Techniques: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.


A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and Flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.

07542 - 2

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Jobsite Safety: Execute all operations and provide a safe work environment in accordance to OSHA standards and regulations. This requirement applies to all contractor personnel, associated subcontractors, workers in other trades, and jobsite visitors.

1. Follow all industry fire prevention guidelines for storage of materials, staging areas, roof access, and application means and methods.

2. Any applicable local fire codes supersede industry guidelines.

D. Roofing System Design: Provide a membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to ASCE 7.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.

1. Flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns. 4. Sheet layout with perimeter and corner defined.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Manufacturer’s standard sample size of sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.

2. Manufacturer’s standard sample size of walkway pads or rolls. 3. Manufacturer’s standard sample size of roof insulation. 4. Manufacturer’s standard sample size of metal termination bars. 5. Manufacturer’s standard sample size of battens. 6. Manufacturer’s standard sample size of vapor retarder. 7. Manufacturer’s standard sample size of substrate board. 8. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 9. Six roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish. 10. Six fasteners or each type, length and finish used for complete roofing

installation.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.

E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

07542 - 3

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system.

H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system.

I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

D. Test Reports:

1. Roof drain and leader test or submit plumber’s verification. 2. Core cut (if requested).

3. Roof deck fastener pullout test.

E. Moisture Survey:

1. Submit prior to installation, results of a non-destructive moisture test of roof system completed by approved third party. Utilizing one of the approved methods:

a. Infrared Thermography b. Nuclear Backscatter

F. Source Limitations: Obtain all components from single source roofing manufacturer.

G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part.

H. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements for preinstallation conferences in

07542 - 4

Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roof deck construction and roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Require that all complimentary trades be present at conference. Including, but

not limited to; electrical, plumbing, HVAC, and framing contractors. 7. Review Flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

8. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

9. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

10. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review Flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,

equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

07542 - 5


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1.9 GUARANTEE

A. Provide manufacturer's system guarantee equal to Johns Manville's Peak Advantage No Dollar Limit Roofing System Guarantee.

1. Single-Source special warranty includes roofing membrane, Flashings, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, substrate board, vapor retarder, walkway products, manufacturer’s expansion joints, manufacturer’s edge metal products, and other single-source components of roofing system marketed by the manufacturer.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer’s Guarantee: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as roofing membrane, Flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

07542 - 6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of Design: Johns Manville Roofing Systems

2.2 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING MEMBRANE

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin, internally fabric or scrim reinforced. Product: JM TPO

1. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal. 2. UL 790 non-combustible assembly required [ADD A]

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Liquid-type auxiliary materials classified as No VOC.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as sheet membrane. Product: JM TPO

C. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's unreinforced sheet flashing of same material as sheet membrane. Product: JM TPO Detail Membrane

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard water-based bonding adhesive for membrane, and solvent-based bonding adhesive for Flashings. Product: JM TPO Membrane Adhesive (Low VOC)

E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, with anchors. Product: JM Termination Systems

F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, prepunched. Product: Membrane Battens

G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. Product: High Load Fasteners and Plates, or as recommended by the supplier

H. Expansion Joints: Provide factory fabricated weatherproof, exterior covers for expansion joint openings consisting of flexible rubber membrane, supported by a closed cell foam to form flexible bellows, with two metal flanges, adhesively and mechanically combined to the bellows by a patented bifurcation process. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single-source membrane supplier that is

07542 - 7

included in the No Dollar Limit guarantee. Product: Expand-O-Flash, or as recommended by the supplier

I. Coping System: Manufacturer’s factory fabricated coping consisting of a base piece and a snap-on cap. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single-source membrane supplier that is included in the No Dollar Limit guarantee. Product: Presto-Lock Coping

J. Fascia System: Manufacturer’s factory fabricated fascia consisting of a base piece and a snap-on cover. Provide product manufactured and marketed by single-source membrane supplier that is included in the No Dollar Limit guarantee. Product: Presto Lock Fascia, or as recommended by the supplier.

K. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. Products: As recommended by the supplier

2.4 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads sourced from membrane roofing system manufacturer. Product: JM TPO Walkpad

2.5 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Product: ENRGY 3

1. Provide insulation package with R Value greater than 21 2. Provide insulation package with minimum thickness to achieve R Value. 3. Install no boards thicker than 1.5”. If insulation package required is thicker than

1.5”, install in multiple layers.

2.6 TAPERED INSULATION

A. Tapered Insulation: ASTM C 1289, provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. Product: Tapered ENRGY 3

2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

07542 - 8

B. Provide factory preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. Product: As recommended by the supplier

C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and provided by roofing system manufacturer. Product: As recommended by the supplier.

D. Cold Fluid-Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's No VOC, two-component cold fluid-applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. Product: MBR Bonding Adhesive

E. Urethane Adhesive: Manufacturer’s two component urethane adhesive formulated to adhere insulation to substrate. Product: JM Green Two-Part Urethane Insulation Adhesive

F. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board. Product: FesCant Plus

G. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."

2.8 VAPOR RETARDER

A. Polyethylene Air Barrier: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm

1. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FMG approved for vapor-retarder application.

B. Torch Applied SBS Vapor Retarder : ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type I, glass-fiber-reinforced SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. Product: As recommended by the supplier.

C. Glass-Fiber Felts: ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt. Product: GlasPly IV

2.9 SUBSTRATE BOARD

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch thick. Product: Securock.

B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, 3/4 inch thick, seal coated. Product: Fesco Board.

C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck. Product: As recommended by the supplier.

07542 - 9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place.

2. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking."

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 RE-ROOF PREPARATION

A. Remove all roofing membrane, surfacing, coverboards, insulation, fasteners, asphalt, pitch, adhesives, etc.

1. Remove an area no larger than can be re-roofed in one day.

B. Tear out all base flashings, counterflashings, pitch pans, pipe flashings, vents and like components necessary for application of new membrane.

C. Remove abandoned equipment curbs, skylights, smoke hatches, and penetrations.

1. Install decking to match existing as directed by Owner's Representative.

07542 - 10

D. Raise, (disconnect by licensed craftsmen, if necessary) all HVAC units and other equipment supported by curbs to conform with the following:

1. Modify curbs as required to provide a minimum 8" base flashing height measured from the surface of the new membrane to the top of the flashing membrane.

2. Nail top of flashing and install new metal counterflashing prior to re-installation of unit.

3. Perimeter nailers must be elevated to match elevation of new roof insulation.

E. Immediately remove all debris from roof surface. Demolished roof system may not be stored on the roof surface.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.

1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Loosely lay polyethylene-sheet vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches , respectively.

1. Seal side and end laps with adhesive.

B. Install modified bituminous vapor retarder sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:

1. Torch apply to substrate. 2. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period

required by manufacturer.

C. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.

1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. 2. Apply roofing granules to cover exuded bead at laps while bead is hot.

07542 - 11

D. Install 2 glass-fiber felt plies lapping each sheet 19 inches over preceding sheet. Embed each sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. Glaze-coat completed surface with hot roofing asphalt. Apply hot roofing asphalt at a rate of 20 lb/100 sq. ft. (1 kg/sq. m), plus or minus 25 percent.

E. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into roofing system.

F. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air movement into membrane roofing system.

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roof system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

C. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees per manufacturer’s instruction.

D. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

F. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 1.5 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

G. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

H. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.

I. Preliminarily Fastened Insulation: Install insulation with fasteners at rate required by roofing system manufacturer or applicable authority, which ever is more stringent.

J. Mechanically Fastened with Subsequent Layers Adhered Insulation: Secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten first layer according to requirements in FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

07542 - 12

2. Fasten first layer to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3. Install subsequent layers in a cold fluid-applied adhesive. 4. Install subsequent layers in a two-part urethane adhesive.

K. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.7 MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install roofing membrane specification ST6RM over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing.

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align roofing membranes and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Mechanically fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

E. Always install membrane laps perpendicular to the steel deck flutes. “Picture Frame” installation method is not permitted.

F. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roofing membrane.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.

a. Remove and repair any unsatisfactory sections before proceeding with Work.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that do not meet requirements.

H. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring.

I. In-Splice Attachment: Secure one edge of roofing membrane using fastening plates or metal battens centered within membrane splice and mechanically fasten roofing membrane to roof deck. Field-splice seam.

J. Through-Membrane Attachment: Secure roofing membrane using fastening plates or metal battens and mechanically fasten roofing membrane to roof deck. Cover battens and fasteners with a continuous cover strip.

07542 - 13

K. Install roofing membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing.

L. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.8 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.9 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.

1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

07542 - 14

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION

07600 - 1

SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL


A. Section Includes: 1. Coping and cap flashings. 2. Overflows and scuppers. 3 Roof flashings. 4. Counterflashings over bituminous base flashings. 5. Counterflashings at roof mounted mechanical equipment and vent stacks. 6. Counterflashings for roof hatches. 7. Precoated galvanized steel gutters and downspouts.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Wood blocking, nailers, and grounds. 2. Section 07542 – Single Ply Roofing. 3. Section 07722 - Roof Hatches. 4. Section 07900 - Sealants. 5. Section 09900 - Painting: Prime and finish painting. 6. Section 15000 - Mechanical 7. Division 16000 - Electrical

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.

B. Federal Specifications (FS):

1. FS SS-C-153 - Cement, Bituminous, Plastic.

C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): 1. NAAMM - Metal Finishes Handbook.

D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):

1. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Work of this Section is to physically protect roofing, base flashings and building systems from damage that would permit water leakage to building interior.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Describe material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, and installation details.

07600 - 2


A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with three years minimum experience.

B. Conform to SMACNA Manual for nominal sizing of components for rainfall intensity

determined by storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years. 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site, store, handle and protect under provisions of Section 01600.

B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation.

C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining,

or damage. 1.07 TOLERANCES

A. Fabricate and install sheet metal with lines, brakes, and angles sharp and true, and surfaces free form objectional wave, warp, or buckle. Fold exposed edges of sheet metal back to form 1/2 inch wide hem on side concealed from view, or as indicated on drawings.

B. Finish work shall be free from water leakage under all weather conditions.

Workmanship and methods employed for forming, anchoring, cleating, and forming of expansion and contraction joints of sheet metal work, must conform to details and description in reference standards unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

C. Where sheet metal abuts or joins adjacent dissimilar metals, execute joint to facilitate

drainage and minimize possibility of galvanic action. 1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide installers written warranty against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of not less than five (5) years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Heavy Coated Exposed Steel: 1. Metal: 24 or 20 gauge galvanized steel. ASTM A 525, Grade A, G90 galvanized

coating. 2. Finish: 1.0 mil. dry film thickness, Kynar 500 meeting AAMA 605.1 standards.

Colors shall be prefinished [standard] [custom] colors as selected by Architects. Provide prefinished metal for all components except for copings, leader boxes, gutters, and downspouts which will be pre-primed and field painted.

07600 - 3

3. Back coat: Epoxy primer, or approved equal.

B. Pre-Primed Galvanized Steel: ASTM A525, G90; 24 gauge core steel, shop pre-coated with zinc chromate coating of selected color.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Gutters: As indicated on drawings, per SMACNA requirements.

B. Downspouts: Rectangular profile.

C. End Caps, Downspout Outlets, Gutter Downpout Straps, Support Brackets, Joint Fasteners, Down Spout Strainers: Profiled to suit scuppers and downspouts.

D. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete type, minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5

percent air entrainment.

E. Lead Flashing: Use lead flashing at sumps, scuppers, pipe roof penetrations at roof areas.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners. Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal.

B. Anchorage Devises for Gutters and Downspouts: Type recommended by fabricator for

specific application.

C. Downspout Supports: Straps, 2 inches wide.

D. Underlayment: ASTM D266; No. 15 asphalt saturated roofing felt at vertical surfaces. At horizontal surfaces use ice and water shield and vertically lap 4 inches minimum.

E. Metal Primer: Zinc chromate. F. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd. G. Protective Back Coating: FS TT-C-494, bituminous.

H. Sealant: Type specified in Section 07900.

I. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, Type I-asphaltic base cement.

J. Reglets: Surface mounted galvanized steel; Type SM; manufactured by Fry; field paint

to match adjacent parapet wall flashing. 2.04 FABRICATION

A. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension and profiles. Contractor shall be responsible for design of flashing and sheet metal assemblies and may make whatever modifications of and additions to details as may be required to

07600 - 4

prevent water and air penetration. Maintain visual design concept as shown.

B. Comply with recommended flashing details of National Contractor's Association and Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACCNA) Manual.

C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim:

1. Form section true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects.

2. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet, minimum 6 inches wide, interlockable with sheet.

3. Provide backing sheet at coping seam (except at corners) with 6" long, 22 ga. cleat matching profile of coping, and set coping in ribbons of 1/4" wide sealant.

4. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. 5. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 6. Form material with standing lock seam. 7. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs seam for

rigidity, seal with sealant. 8. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed

to form drip.

D. Scuppers, Gutters and Downspouts: 1. Form scuppers, gutters and downspouts of profiles as shown on drawings, to

SMACNA requirements 2. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 3. Fabricate with required connection pieces. 4. Form sections square, true and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths

and free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.

5. Hem exposed edges of metal. 6. Fabricate scupper, gutter and downspouts accessories; seal watertight.

2.04 FINISH

A. Shop prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces.

B. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to minimum dry film thickness of 15 mils.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and conditions are as instructed by

manufacturer.

B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located.

07600 - 5

C. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed and secure.

D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.

B. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.

C. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and level. Seal top of reglets with sealant.

D. Cover wall surfaces with No. 15 asphalic roofing felt. Lap felt joints 3 inches minimum and turn up 6 inches minimum. Cover horizontal surfaces with ice and water shield. Turn up 6-inch minimum at abutting vertical surfaces.

E. Nail felt flashing at a 6 inch center on laps and edges.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet metal flashing, trim, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with Contract Documents, manufacturer's instructions, and applicable provisions of SMACNA Sheet Metal Manual. 1. Conform to drawing details included in manual.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim:

1. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight secure fit. 2. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners

only in locations approved by Architect. 3. Seam and seal all joints. 4. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. 5. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in

planes, and lines accurate to profiles. 6. Slope top of all parapet wall coping 1/4 inch per foot toward building interior. 7. Seal metal joints watertight.

C. Scuppers, Gutters and Downspouts:

1. Join lengths with formed seams sealed watertight. Flash and seal gutters to downspouts and accessories.

2. Apply backing paint to metal back surfaces. 3. Apply bituminous protective backing on surfaces in contact with dissimilar

materials. 4. Slope gutters 1/8 inch per foot minimum 5. Seal metal joints watertight. 6. Connect downspouts to storm sewer system. Seal connection watertight. 7. Align downspouts with hubs. Where downspouts do not properly align, reset

hubs to align properly at no extra cost to Owner.

D. Flat Seams: In compliance with SMACNA manual. Solder lap seams around roof scuppers.

07600 - 6

E. Parapet Wall Coping Provide solid blocking to slope top of wall 1/4 inch per foot toward building. Install 6 inch wide back-up plates behind coping cross joints. Install sealant between back-up plate and coping panel. Form cross joints to comply with Plate 68 of the SMACNA manual. Lock front edge in continuous cleat. Miter, seam, and seal corners of coping.

F. Metal Base Flashing: Install galvanized base flashing where roof meets vertical

surface without a cant strip.

G. Elastrometric Flashing: Install at locations indicated on drawings and a specified herein. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions.

H. Felt Flashing: Install between roofing membrane and sheet metal parapet coping.

Overlap joints 6 inches minimum. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed surfaces of flashing of foreign materials and other substances which might cause corrosion.

B. Protect installed work. Work which does become damaged in any way is not watertight

shall be repaired and/or replaced as directed to satisfaction of Architect and/or Owner at no additional cost or time.

3.05 SCHEDULE

A. Heavy Coated Steel (20 gauge) Parapet Wall: Coping, roof caps, and all exposed sheet metal other than leader boxes, downspouts, flashing and parapet coping.

B. Heavy Coated Steel (24 gauge): Wall metal flashing and roof counter flashing typical.

C. Pre-Coated Galvanized Steel (24 gauge): Downspouts, gutters and all non-exposed

components. Pre-primed galvanized for field paint at exposed location.

END OF SECTION

07900 - 1

SECTION 07900 SEALANTS


A. Section Includes: 1. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. 2. Sealant and backing.


1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2 Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 2. Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation and Finish System 3. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. 4. Section 08800 - Glazing. 5. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 2. ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and

Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam). 3. ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds. 4. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants. 5. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. 6. ASTM C920 - Sealants.

B. Federal Specifications (FS):

1. FS TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component. 2. FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component. 3. FS TT-S-001543 - Sealing Compound.

C. Sealing and Waterproofers Institute (SWI):

1. Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability.

2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified

07900 - 2

in this Section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in applying work of this Section with minimum three years documented successful experience.

C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and

installation.

D. Obtain elastomeric materials only from manufacturers who will, if required, send a qualified technical representative to project site for the purpose of advising the installer of proper procedures and precautions for use of the materials.

E. Installer shall use sealant which installer will guarantee for the installations shown, and

shall request variations from these specified products, if required to meet performance conditions.

1.05 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Provide samples under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Construct field sample 6 feet long illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface.

C. Conduct pull tests per ASTM C 1521 and in the presence of the manufacturer's representative against all relevant substrate types in order to verify adhesion. Make sure that field samples are applied with and without priming in the event that primer is needed. Allow 14 days minimum cure time prior to conducting pull tests.

D. Accepted sample may remain as part of Work.


A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.

B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

C. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions, or

when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation.

D. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for

proper cure and development of high early bond strength.

E. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and bond stress at subsequent low temperatures.



07900 - 3

B. Coordinate work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section.

C. Pre-Installation Meeting:

1. At the Contractor's direction, 14-21 days prior to installation, the installer, sealant manufacturer's technical representative, and other trades involved in coordination with sealant work meet with the Contractor at the project site to review the procedures and time schedule proposed for installation of sealants in coordination with other work.

2. Review each major sealant application required on the project.

D. The installer must examine the joint surfaces, backing, and anchorage, and the conditions under which the sealant work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work and performance of the sealants.

E. Do not proceed with the sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. Commencing with installation of sealant materials constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s warranty as listed below under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve

air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS

A. Sealant (Type S-1): STPe (Silyl-Terminated Polyether) Sealant - ASTM C920 Class 25, Grade NS, Type M, FS TT-S-00227, Type II, Class A, single or multi-component, chemical curing, non-staining non-bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sag type; color as selected; Sonolastic 150 Tint-Base (multi-component) or Sonolastic 150 VLM (single-component) or approved equal. Warranty duration for this sealant type is ten (10) years.

B. Sealant (Type S-2): Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: FS TT-S-00227, ASTM

C920, Class A, Type II Two Component - self - leveling, multi component color as selected; THC 900 by Tremco or Sonolastic SL2 by Sonneborn. Warranty duration for this sealant type is five (5) years.

C. Sealant (Type S-3): Silicone or STPe (Silyl-Terminated Polyether) Sealant FS TT-S-

01543, and FS TT-S-00230 a single component, low modulus, color as selected; Proglaze by Tremco, Dow Corning 795 or Sonneborn Sonolastic 150 VLM or approved equal. Warranty duration for this sealant type is ten (10) years.

D. Sealant (Type S-4): Acrylic Emulsion Latex: ASTM C834, single component;

paintable, fast setting, white color; Acrylic Latex Caulk as manufactured by Tremco, AC

07900 - 4

20 Acrylic Latex by Pecora or Sonolac by Sonneborn. Warranty duration for this sealant type is ten (10) years.

E. Sealant (Type S-5): STPe (Silyl-Terminated Polyether) Sealant FS TTI-S-1543, Type

S, class 25, grade NS, one component, mildew resistant. Warranty duration for this sealant type is ten (10) years.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: Use non-gassing type Sof-Rod backer rod. Do not use either open-cell

foam or standard closed cell foam backing materials

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.


A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by manufacturer.

B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces and substrate.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.

C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. For elastomeric sealants, do not proceed with installation of sealant over joint surfaces

which have been painted, lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water repellent or other treatment or coating unless a laboratory test for durability (adhesion), has successfully demonstrated that sealant bond is not impaired by coating or treatment. If laboratory test has not been performed or shows bond interference, remove coating or treatment from joint surfaces before installing sealant.

E. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity unless sealant

manufacturer's printed instructions indicated that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with diluted ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation.

07900 - 5

F. Roughen joint surfaces on vitreous coated and similar nonporous materials where sealant manufacturer's data indicated lower bond strength than for porous surfaces. Rub with fine abrasive to produce a dull sheen.

G. Perform preparation in accordance with:

1. ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. 2. ASTM C790 for latex base sealants.

H. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform installation in accordance with Contract Documents and following: 1. ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants. 2. ASTM C790 for latex base sealants.

B. Install sealant in accordance with Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions.

C. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. D. Install joint backing material to achieve minimum 25% compression of the backer rod

diameter. E. Prime joint surfaces based on results from Field Sample mock-ups and subsequent

pull tests performed on same. F. Install bond breaker tape in joints too shallow to accommodate backer rod.

G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult

manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied with these temperature ranges

H. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

I. Employ only proven installation techniques which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, tool sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface,

slightly below adjoining surfaces. 2. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface,

fill joint to form a slight cove so that joints will not trap moisture and dirt. 3. Sand brick joints to match mortar.

J. Tool joints concave.

3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING

A. Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

C. Spillage:

07900 - 6

1. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces including precast concrete panels and similar rough textures. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces by either primer/sealer to the sealant/caulking compound.

2. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as work progresses. Clean the adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage without damaging substrate.

D. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.

3.05 TESTS FOR PERFORMANCE

A. After nominal cure of exterior joint sealants which are exposed to weather, test for water leaks. Flood joint exposure with water directed from a 3/4 inch garden hose held perpendicular to wall face 2'-0" from joint, connected to a water system with 30 psi minimum static water pressure at the nozzle. Move stream of water along joint at an approximate rate of 20 feet per minute.

B. Test approximately 5% of total joint system in locations which are typical of every joint

condition, and which can be inspected easily for leakage on opposite face. Conduct test in presence of the General Contractor who will determine a actual percentage of joints to be tested and actual period of exposure to water from hose, based upon extent of observed leakage, or lack thereof. Repair sealant installation at leaks or, if leakage is excessive, replace sealant installation as directed.

C. Where nature of observed leakage indicates possibility of inadequate joints bond

strength, General Contractor will direct additional testing be performed at a time when joints have been fully cured.


A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.

B. Protect sealants until cured. 3.07 SCHEDULE

A. Sealant (Type S-1): At exterior and interior non-traffic bearing joints where one or both joint surfaces are porous (such as concrete, masonry, etc.).

B. Sealant (Type S-2): At exterior and interior traffic bearing joints subject to foot or

vehicular traffic, and exterior and interior exposed perimeter joints in slabs abutting walls or other vertical surfaces.

C. Sealant (Type S-3): At exterior storefront system.

D. Sealant (Type S-4): At interior miscellaneous non-traffic joints.

E. Sealant (Type S-5): At interior Toilet Rooms.

01 January 06 07900 - 7

END OF SECTION

08110 - 1

SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES


A. Section Includes: 1. Interior hollow metal steel doors and frames.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08117 - Prefinished Steel Door Frames 2. Section 08210 - Wood Doors. 2. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. 3. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors and frames.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Steel Door Institute (SDI): 1. SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.


1. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Conform to requirements of SDI-100. 1. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing Products

specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site, store, protect, and handle under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.


A. Verify that field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer. 1.06 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

08110 - 2


A. Acceptable Hollow Metal Door Manufacturers:

1. Ceco Corp. 2. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. 3. Curries.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Interior Door Frames: Steel, 20 gauge, thickness to suit grade and model of door. 2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Face: Steel sheet in accordance with ANSI/SDI-100.

B. Core: Polyurethane or polystyrene foam.

C. Thermal Insulated Door: Total insulation value of R-5, measured in accordance with ASTM C236.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber.

B. Protective Coatings:

1. Primer: Zinc chromate type. 2. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion.

2.05 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcement welded in place.

B. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.

C. Prepare frame for silencers at interior door. Provide three single rubber silencers for

single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side, and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions.

D. Finish:

1. Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A60. 2. Primer: Air dried. 3. Interior Frames: Factory finish polyester paint color as selected from

manufacturers standard colors.

08110 - 3


A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01039.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors and frames in accordance with Contract Documents, and ANSI/SDI-100.

B. Coordinate with masonry wallboard wall construction for anchor placement.

C. Fill frames separating interior and exterior spaces with mineral wood insulation.

D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. Refer to Section 08710 for door hardware.

E. Touch-up primer and factory finished frames.

F. Erection Tolerances:

1. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to

corner. 3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION

08210 - 1

SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS


A. Section Includes: 1. Non-Rated interior wood doors.


1. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames 2. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. 3. Section 09900 - Painting

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Wood Manufacturers Association (NWMA): 1. NWMA I.S.1 - Industry Standard For Wood Flush Doors (Includes

Standards I.S.1.1 through I.I.S.1.7).

B. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): 1. AWI - Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute.


A. Conform to requirements of AWI Quality Standard Section 1300 and 1400 Premium Grade.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Deliver products to Site, store, and protect under provisions of Section 01600.

B. Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with AWI requirements. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Control: Protect doors from sudden and extreme changes in temperature and humidity.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700. B. Warranty:

1. Furnish written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped or which show telegraphing of construction below in face veneers, as defined in NWMA Standard Door Guarantee.

08210 - 2

2. Include, in guarantee, refinishing and reinstallation required due to repair

or replacement of defective doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Door Manufacturers: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. CENCO. 3. Weyerhauser.


2.02 DOOR TYPES

A. Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core construction; wood veneer faces.

2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION (AWI QUALITY STANDARD)

A. Solid, Non-Rated Core: AWI Section 1300, PC-Particleboard. 2.04 FLUSH DOOR FACING

A. Facing Quality: AWI custom grade.

B. Flush Interior Door Veneer: Birch Veneer 2.05 ADHESIVES

A. Interior Doors: AWI, Type II, water resistant. 2.06 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements.

B. Provide flush doors with 1/2 inch thick edge strips of wood species to match face

veneer. C. Pre-machine doors for finish hardware.

2.07 FINISHES

A. Doors shall receive clear varnish.

08210 - 3

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Verify that door frames are of type required for specific doors, and are installed in manner suitable for scheduled application. 1. Do not install doors in frames which would hinder operation of doors.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with Contract Documents, reviewed Shop Drawings and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Machine cut relief for hinges, closers and coring for handsets and cylinders.

C. Trim door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges to maximum of 3/16 inch.

D. Trim door height by cutting equally on top and bottom edges as required.

E. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes.

F. Prepare doors to receive finish hardware in accordance with AWI requirements.

G. Conform to AWI requirements for fit tolerances.

3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

B. Top and Edge Margin: 3/32" inch.

C. Floor Clearance: 1/2" inch.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION

08331 - 1

SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS


A. Section Includes: 1. Standard overhead coiling doors; manual operated; factory precoated front and

back finish.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Wall angles. 2. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Cylinder core and keys. 3. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/American Society for Testing and Materials (ANSI/ASTM): 1. ANSI/ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-dip

Process, Commercial Quality. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.


A. Hand chain lift unit with overhead counter balance device. 1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Provide manufacturers specifications and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Provide pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and details, anchorage methods, hardware location, and installation details.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.

08331 - 2


A. Acceptable Overhead Coiling Door Manufacturers: 1. Cookson Co. 2. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. 3. Overhead Door Corp.


2.02 MATERIALS

A. Curtain: 1. Minimum 20 gage slats of steel, ANSI/ASTM A526; galvanized with minimum

1.25 oz/sq ft coating in accordance with ASTM A525. 2. Slat size: 2-1/2 inches wide x required length. 3. Ends of alternate slat fitted with endlocks to act as wearing surface in guides and

to prevent lateral movement. 4. Bottom fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact with floor

in closed position. 5. Labeled, in accordance with requirements scheduled on Drawings.

B. Curtain Guides: Formed steel angles for required sizes and configurations.

C. Roller Shaft (Counterbalance):

1. Steel pipe and helical steel spring system capable of producing sufficient torque to assure easy operation of curtain from any position.

2. Adjustable spring tension.

D. Housing: 24 guage galvanized steel; internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and form.

E. Weatherstripping: Water and rot proof, resilient type; located along jamb edges, bottom of curtain, and within housing.

F. Hardware:

1. Manufacturer's heavy duty type. 2. Locks: Slide bolt and chain keeper. 3. Cylinders for Locks: As specified in Section 08710.

2.04 FINISH

A. Galvanized steel. Precoated primer paint finish, field painted color as selected by Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead coiling doors, in accordance with Contract Documents, reviewed Shop

08331 - 3

Drawings, and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Fit, align, and adjust door assembly level and plumb; provide smooth operation. END OF SECTION

08410 - 1

SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS


A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum doors and frames. 2. Vision glass. 3. Door hardware. 4. Integral air and vapor barrier. 5. Perimeter sealant.


1. Section 07900 - Sealants: System perimeter sealant and back-up materials. 2. Section 08800 - Glazing.

C. Products Installed but Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this

section.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide

Specifications Manual. 2. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic

Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. 3. AAMA SFM-1 - Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. 2. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 3. ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube. 4. ASTM E283 - Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and

Doors. 5. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and

Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 6. ASTM E331 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections, shop fabricated, factory pre-finished, vision glass, glass infill, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.

08410 - 2


A. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with applicable code and as measured in accordance with ASTM E330.

B. Limit mullion deflection to 1/200; with full recovery of glazing materials.

C. System shall accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals,

movement within system, movement between system and peripheral construction, dynamic loading and release of loads, deflection of structural support framing.

D. Limit air leakage through assembly to 0.06 cfm/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at

reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E283.

E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with test

pressure difference of 2.86 lbs/sq ft.

F. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.

G. System shall provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused

by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over 12 hour period without causing detrimental affect to system components.

H. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating

moisture occurring within system, to exterior by weep drainage network. 1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related work and expansion and contraction joint location and details.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified

requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 Guide Specifications Manual.

B. Conform to requirements of ANSI A117.1. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years documented experience.

08410 - 3


A. Deliver products to site, store, protect, and handle under provisions of Section 01600.

B. Protect pre-finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.


A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F during and 48 hours after installation.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039. 1.12 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Warranty: Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified requirements.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. U.S. Aluminum. 2. Kawneer Company, Inc. B. Substitutions are not allowed.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221; 6063 alloy, T5 temper.

B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209; 6063 alloy, T5 temper.

C. Fasteners: Galvanized steel.

2.03 COMPONENTS A. Frame: 2 x 4½ inch nominal dimension; applied glazing stops; drainage holes; internal

weep drainage system, compensating head channel J.C. 460 and sub sill A.F.100 flashing system.

08410 - 4

B. Doors: 1 3/4 inches thick, narrow style, 2-1/8 inch wide top rail, 2 inch wide vertical stiles, 10 inch wide bottom rail; square glazing stops.

C. Flashings: .080 inch thick aluminum finish to match mullion sections where exposed.

2.04 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08800 of Types described below: 1. Glass in Exterior Lights: Type SG-A and SG-B. 2. Glass in Door Lights: Type FG-B.

2.05 SEALANT MATERIALS

A. Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07900 of types described below: 1. Perimeter Sealant: Silicone sealant.

2.06 HARDWARE

A. Weather Stripping: Nylon pile, continuous and replaceable.

B. Door Bottom Sweep: Surface applied weatherstrip BW 200.

C. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface meeting ANSI A117.1 requirements, U.S. Aluminum TH 400.

D. Pivots: Offset type.

E. Push/Pull: U.S. Aluminum PS001 and PS002 style.

F. Closer: Overhead, 90° concealed type with holdo pen.

G. Deadlatch: Adams-Rite Model MS1850-A at single doors. Adams-Rite Model MS4085-A 3 pt. at double doors.

H. Cylinder Lock: Refer to Section 08710 for cylinder.

I. Signage: Applied sign stating "This door shall remain unlocked during business hours"

as required by local jurisdictional official.

J. Stops: Manufacturer’s standard. 2.07 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and

weatherproof.

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.

08410 - 5

D. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.

E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware and door operator

hinge hardware.

F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. 2.08 FINISHES

A. Finish coatings to conform to AAMA 606.1.

B. Interior: Clear aluminum finish, AA-M10C22A41 (Class I)

C. Exterior: Dark Bronze finish, AA-M10C22A44 (Class I), or match existing.

D. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386 to 2.0 oz/sq ft. E. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in

contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify site opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.

C. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive

work of this Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with Contract Documents, reviewed Shop Drawings,

manufacturer's instructions and AAMA - Metal Curtain Wall, Window, Store Front and Entrance - Guide Specifications Manual.

B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction

tolerances and other irregularities.

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.

D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional

tolerances.

E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.

F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.

08410 - 6

G. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity

of thermal barrier.

H. Install flashings and column covers as required.

I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.

J. Install hardware using templates provided.

K. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria.

L. Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria in criteria in

accordance with Section 07900. 3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft, whichever is less.

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.

B. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.

C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.

D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.


A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.

B. Protect finished Work from damage.

END OF SECTION

08460 - 1

SECTION 08460 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS


A. Automatic sliding doors with operator and motion/presence sensor control device. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts B. Section 08700 - HardwareC. Section 08800 - Glazing D. Section 16000 - Electrical

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings B. ANSI/BHMA 156.10 - Power Operated Pedestrian Doors C. ANSI/UL 325 - Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems


A. Doors Powered to Open Position: 1. Doors powered by DC electric motor and mechanical gear assembly transmitted to active

leaves by fiberglass-reinforced tooth drive belt for silent operation. Doors using roller chain, cable, or hydraulic devices shall not be accepted.

2. Power door to open position by signals received by microprocessor from the actuation controls.

3. The last portion of the opening cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that electronically reduces voltage to motor until door is fully open. Door systems that use microswitches shall not be accepted.

4. To permit safe passage if an obstruction is detected between opening doors and surrounding walls or interior fittings, the doors shall immediately stop and after a delay go to the full closed position. Door systems that only monitor the door travel while closing shall not be acceptable.

B. Doors Powered to Closed Position:

1. The active leafs will only be powered to closed position when all actuating devices are cleared and after remaining in the open position for a preset time delay (per ANSI standards).

2. The last portion of the closing cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that electronically reduces voltage to the motor until door is fully closed.

3. To permit safe passage between closing doors, the doors immediately reverse to open position if an obstruction is detected, then resume their interrupted movement at low speed to check whether the obstruction has disappeared or not. Door systems that only monitor the door travel while opening shall not be acceptable.

C. Emergency Breakaway:

1. Full Breakout System: Interior sliding active leaves and sidelites swing out from any position in sliding mode.

2. Fixed Sidelite System: Exterior sliding active leaves swing out from any position in sliding mode.

3. Breakaway Pressure: Field adjustable to building code requirements and in accordance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10 maximum of 50 pounds.

08460 - 2

D. Watchdog Monitoring:

1. Microprocessor Software: Constantly monitor drive train system operations. 2. Watchdog Control Circuit: Assume command of system and shut down automatic function

by holding doors open, should door speed, motor function, or drive train operations deviate from design criteria ranges.

3. Secondary Supervisory Circuit: Monitor main Watchdog control circuit every 255 door cycles, ready to perform as a backup.

E. Energy Saving Device:

1. Switch: Recessed in interior header cover. 2. Door Opening Settings: Off, exit only, 2-way traffic, partial opening, and hold fully open. 3. Partial Opening Mode: Switch reduces total door opening to reduce conditioned air loss.

A. Microprocessor Programmed Intelligence: Door opening automatically resumes full-open position whenever traffic flow exceeds preset volumes.

B. Door returns to reduced opening mode when traffic subsides. 4. Heavy Weather Pile: Between doors and sidelites and between emergency breakaway

hardware and door stiles. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide doors that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding standard systems.

B. Compliance: 1. ANSI/BHMA 156.10. 2. ANSI/UL 325 listed. 3. Air Infiltration per ASTM E283-91 – Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air

Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across Specimen.

a. Fixed sidelite: static pressure air infiltration conducted at 0.57 psf (15 mph) with a 0.6 cfm/ft² result and 1.57 psf (25 mph) with a 1.1 cfm/ft² result.

b. Full breakout: static pressure air infiltration conducted at 0.57 psf (15 mph) with a .07 cfm/ft² result and 1.57 psf (25 mph) with a 1.3 cfm/ft² result.

4. Structural Performance (wind load) per ASTM E330-07 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Testing conducted at positive and negative loads.

a. Fixed sidelite: 50 psf (150 mph) b. Full breakout: 37 psf (120 mph) 5. Forced Entry Resistance per AAMA 1303.5 – Voluntary Specifications for Forced Entry

Resistant Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors. C. Automatic door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian traffic. D. Automatic door equipment accommodates up to following weights for active leaf doors:

1. Bi-Part Doors: 220 pounds (100 kg) per active leaf. 2. Single Slide Doors: 440 pounds (200 kg) per active leaf.

E. Operating Temperature Range: -35 degrees F to 131 degrees F (-30 degrees C to 55 degrees C). F. Motion and Presence Detection System: Uses planar K-band microwave technology to detect

motion and focused active infrared technology to detect presence, in a single housing. G. Systems With Transom Over 16'-0" (4,877 mm) or With Heavy Glass: System can span up to 16

feet without overhead support. Systems at 16'-0", with transoms, or with heavy glass shall install anti-sag rods through transom verticals.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials,

08460 - 3

components, fabrication, finishes, and installation. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and

details, indicating dimensions, materials, and fabrication of doors, frames, sidelites, operator, motion/presence sensor control device, anchors, hardware, finish, options, and accessories.

D. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of aluminum finishes. E. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from UL, CUL, and ICBO indicating doors comply

with specified performance requirements. F. Manufacturer's Project References: Submit list of successfully completed projects including

project name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of doors manufactured. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit manufacturer's field reports from AAADM certified

technician of inspection and approval of doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10 after completion of installation.

H. Operation and Maintenance Manual: 1. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual. 2. Include spare parts list.

I. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard warranty shall be one year from date of installation. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified, with a

minimum of 10 years successful experience. 2. Member: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM). 3. Door, frame, operator, and sensor components from same manufacturer.

B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Minimum of 2 years successful experience in installation of similar doors. 2. Local certified Besam distributor. 4. 3. Approved by manufacturer.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site protected from damage. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Manufacturer shall provide factory-owned central-dispatch system for maintenance service. B. The manufacturer shall maintain a company owned dispatch system that shall be available 24

hours per day, 365 days per year to insure proper service capability. C. A manufacturer's employee, not an answering service, shall obtain malfunction information and

dispatch appropriate service agency to project location. D. Toll free phone number, 1-877-BESAM-US (1-877-237-2687), shall be prominently displayed on

header of each operator. E. Outside contractors or answering services are not acceptable.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Besam Entrance Solutions, 1900 Airport Road, Monroe, North Carolina 28110. Toll Free (866) BESAM-US. Phone (704)290-5551. Fax (704)290-5555. Web Site www.besam.com. E-Mail [email protected].

08460 - 4

2.2 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS

A. Model: Unislide automatic sliding doors. 1. Aluminum doors and frames with sidelite and active door leaves. 2. Overhead-concealed, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled, sliding door operator. 3. Operator housing, floor rollers, and door carriers.

B. Dimensions: As indicated on the drawings

2.3 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Doors and Frames: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. 1. Hydraulic dampers (optional): provide 90 degree stop and cushion door upon opening and

closing during emergency breakout conditions. B. Glass:

1. Glazing Material: ANSI Z97.1. 2. Active Leaves: 1/4-inch tempered glass. 3. Sidelites: 1/4-inch tempered glass. 4. Field-glazed or preglazed.

C. Door Carriers: 1. Roller Wheels: 2 steel roller wheels, 1-3/4-inch diameter, per active door leaf for operation

over replaceable Delrin track. Single journal with sealed oil-impregnated bearings. 2. 2 self-aligning anti-risers per leaf.

D. Vertical Jambs: 1-3/4 inches by 4-1/2 inches E. Header:

1. Span: Maximum 16'-0" without intermediate supports when using 1/4-inch glass. 2. Size: 7-3/4 inches wide by 6-7/8 inches high. 3. Hinge Point: Allows access for adjustments. 4. Design: Closed header.

F. Stiles: 4 inches wide. G. Pivots: Top and bottom concealed pivots, extruded aluminum. H. Hardware: Breakaway. I. Exterior Glazing Stop Extrusion: Nonremovable, security-type glazing bead to prevent

unauthorized entry. 2.4 SLIDING DOOR OPERATOR

A. Operator: 1. Overhead-concealed or surface-applied, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled. 2. Motor: High-efficiency, energy-efficient, DC motor. 3. Mechanical drive assembly. 4. Microprocessor System: Sets opening and closing speeds based on factory-adjusted

configuration settings. 5. Mechanical Limit Switches: Not acceptable. 6. Adjustable Hold Open Time Delay: 0 to 60 seconds. 7. Software: Incorporates self-diagnosing system.

2.5 AIR INFILTRATION

Weatherstripping: All active door panel weatherstripping shall be concealed, “finned-pile.”

2.6 STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE (WIND LOAD COMPLIANCE) AND FORCED ENTRY RESISTANCE

A. Locking shall be independent 2 pt- locking system in each active leaf and include exterior key

08460 - 5

cylinder and interior thumb turn. B. Threshold shall be aluminum, ½” x 4-1/2” running full width of package. Lead-up: optional.

2.7 MOTION AND PRESENCE SENSOR CONTROL DEVICE

A. Model: The BEA Wizard Sliding Door Sensing System 1. Uses planar K-band microwave technology to detect motion and focused active infrared

technology to detect presence, in a single housing. The focused active infrared presence technology overlaps the motion pattern.

2. The active infrared is comprised of 96 spots of detection made out of four rows of 24 spots of detection each (two rows on each side of the door). The focused presence technology never shuts off during closing cycle of the door. The Wizard Vis self-monitoring (motion and presence sensor) and has the capability to make adjustments with a universal remote control. The self-monitored Wizard communicates with the Unislide through a monitoring connection. The self-monitoring connection allows the door to go into a failsafe mode in the event of a sensor failure.

3. Operating temperature range of –30o F to 131o F. 4. Switches and Sensor: Field installed and adjusted.

2.8 ELECTRICAL

A. High-Efficiency DC Motor: Maximum of 3 A current draw. Allow for 5 operators to run on one 20 A line.

B. Power: Self-detecting line voltage capable control. 120 V through 240V, 50/60 Hz, 3 A incoming power with solid-earth ground connection for each door system. 5 door systems on one 20 A circuit.

C. Wiring: Separate channel raceway free from moving parts. D. Brown out/high voltage capability: System has capability to operate at full performance well

beyond brown out and high line voltage conditions (85V – 265V) sensing changes and adjusting automatically.

E. Convenience Battery: Shall be concealed in header and capable of full operation with blackout conditions, including sensor capabilities for typically 100 cycles.

2.9 ANODIZED ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Interior: Clear aluminum finish, AA-M10C22A41 (Class I) B. Exterior: Dark Bronze finish, AA-M10C22A44 (Class I), or match existing.


A. Examine and measure areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent utilization of doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance. B. Ensure proper support has been provided at operator header. C. Ensure floor is level and smooth.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10.

08460 - 6

B. Install doors and beam plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack. C. Anchor frames securely in place. D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means

approved by Architect. E. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position. F. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved

by Architect. G. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined

by Architect. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for

installation of doors. 2. Before placing doors in operation, AAADM certified technician shall inspect and approve

doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA 156.10. Certified technician shall be approved by manufacturer.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage glass or finish.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed doors and finish to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors and finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

08710 - 1

SECTION 08710

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Architectural and door hardware not specifically supplied as part of door

assemblies or manufactured items.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Section 10441 - Address Signs.

C. Products Furnished but Not Installed Under This Section:

1. Furnish templates to Section 08110 and 08110 for door and frame preparation. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Institute (ANSI/NFPA): 1. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to

and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 3. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.

B. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).

1. AWI Quality Standards Guide Specifications and Quality certification Program.

C. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA).

D. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).

E. Steel Door Institute (SDI). 1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Hardware Schedule: Submit six (6) copies of the final hardware schedule in the manner and format specified, complying with the actual construction progress schedule requirements (for each draft). Hardware schedules are intended for coordination of the work. Review and acceptance by the architect or Owner does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions and of his exclusive responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified. Three (3) corrected copies shall be returned to the Architect. 1. Format of Schedule: The following is an example of the required format only of

the final hardware schedule:

08710 - 2

Hardware Set 'A'

Door No. 101

Butt Hinges FBB170 US26D 5x42 Lock Set D70PD-Orbit 26D Closer LCN-4114 Al Kickplate 5024 10x34 479 Beige Bumper 407B US26D Silencers 21

2. Hardware schedules prepared in the horizontal manner are not acceptable.

Doors listed for the same hardware, but of different sizes shall be listed under separate headings.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. 2. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, inspection

procedures related to preventative maintenance, and maintenance requirements for exposed finishes.


A. Coordination: Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware.

B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware

with minimum three years documented experience.

C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with minimum three years documented experience, and an authorized factory direct distributor.

D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and

frames. 2. Conform to applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101. 3. Comply with all requirements of the "Americans with Disabilities Act".

E. Keying Requirements:

1. Assist Owner in setting keying schedule. 2. Make modifications to keying schedule as required by Owner without cost to

Owner. 3. Secure Owner's written approval of final keying schedule prior to ordering locking

items. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match hardware schedule. Include necessary screws, keys instructions and

08710 - 3

installation templates.

C. Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.

D. Protect hardware from loss or damage throughout construction period: 1. Catalog and store in secure area. 2. Replace all missing or damaged items with no additional cost to Owner. 3. Leave installed hardware clean and in proper operating condition, maintaining all

key identification tags in place, clean and legible. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Furnish hardware of proper design for use on doors and frames of thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function.

B. Templates:

1. Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work scheduled to be factory prepared for installation of hardware.

2. Check Shop Drawings of such other work to confirm adequate provisions for proper installation of hardware.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Warranty: Provide five year coverage of door closers.

C. Provide adjustment for 1 year of door hardware and closers. 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.

B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component

manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: As noted within the hardware schedule.

B. Substitutions: Not Allowed.

C. Fasteners: 1. Provide all necessary screws, bolts, anchors or other devices of suitable size and

type to securely anchor hardware in position.

08710 - 4

2. Exposed fasteners shall harmonize with hardware material and finish. Notify Architect of any mismatch of finish prior to installation.

3. Provide phillips head counter sunk fasteners for all expose locations. Furnish hardware with approved anchors for intended application according to hardware manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Fire Classification: Where doors carry UL Label for fire classification, all hardware

applied to that door shall comply with that classification. 2.02 LOCKSETS AND CYLINDERS:

A. All locksets to be 2 3/4" backset.

B. All locks to have removable cores. 2.03 KEYING

A. Door Locks: Master keyed, Grand master keyed, Great grand master keyed, including construction keying.

B. Supply 3 keys for each lock.

C. Supply keys in following quantities: 1. 6 master keys. 2. 6 grand master keys. 3. 6 great grand master keys. 4. 10 construction keys.

2.04 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Exposed finishes shall be Satin Chrome / Aluminum except as otherwise noted in schedule at the end of this Section.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and regulatory requirements.

B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item:

1. Locksets: 40 inches.

08710 - 5

*All other hardware shall be installed as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Conform to ANSI A117.1 for positioning requirements for handicapped.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Initial Installation: 1. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to verify proper

operation and function of all units. 2. Lubricate moving parts as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Replace, at no extra cost, units which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to

operate freely and smoothly as intended for application.

B. Final Adjustment: 1. When hardware installation occurs more than one month prior to acceptance or

occupancy of space or area, make final check and adjustment of hardware items one week prior to acceptance or occupancy.

2. Clean and relubricate operating items as necessary to restore function and finish of hardware and doors.

3. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

C. Instructions: Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of

hardware and hardware finishes, during final acceptance of hardware. 3.04 SCHEDULE

A. Furnish the hardware indicated on the Door Schedule as shown on the Drawings, or as required to complete the facility.

Hardware Set 'A'

Armored Strike MS+4002 Adams Rite Hookbolt Latch/Lock MS+1890 Adams Rite Temporary Cylinder 4036 Adams Rite Mortise Turn Knob Cylinder 4066 Adams Rite on interior side Mortise Cylinder with 80-133 Schlage interchangeable core on exterior side Saddle Threshold Besam Interchangable Store Core 80-037 Schlage Adhesive Sign (1” black letters) 7741BC Trimco/BBW “This Door To Remain Unlocked When The Building Is Occupied”

Hardware Set 'B'

Butt Hinges FBB 191 Stanley Closer 4040H-CUSH LCN Indicator Lever Latch C6FS Vizilok (ADA Compliant) Wall Stop WS402CCV Ives

08710 - 6

Silencers SR66 Ives

Hardware Set 'C'

Butt Hinges FBB 191 Stanley Closer 4040H-CUSH LCN Lever Latch S10D SAT Schlage Wall Stop WS402CCV Ives Silencers SR66 Ives

Hardware Set 'D'

Butt Hinges FBB 191 Stanley Lever Latch S80D SAT Schlage Wall Stop WS402CCV Ives Silencers SR66 Ives

Hardware Set 'E'

Butt Hinges FBB 191 Stanley Closer 4040H-CUSH LCN Lever Latch S50D SAT Schlage Wall Stop WS402CCV Ives Silencers SR66 Ives

Hardware Set 'F'

Butt Hinges F 179 Stanley Lever Latch S50D SAT Schlage Wall Stop WS402CCV Ives Silencers SR66 Ives

Hardware Set 'G'

1½ pr Butts FBB 191 NRP Stanley 4 ½ x 4 ½ Battery Powered 2670 Von Duprin Alarmed Rim Exit Device (30 second delay) Closer 4040H - Cush LCN Threshold 171-A Pemko Weatherstrip S88 Pemko Door Top 346C Pemko Door Bottom 315CN Pemko

END OF SECTION

08800 - 1

SECTION 08800 GLAZING


A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and glazing for Sections referencing this Section for products and

installation.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07900 - Sealants. 2. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and

Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 2. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety

Glazing Used in Buildings.

B. Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC): 1. CPSC - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials - 16 CFR 1201.

C. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA):

1. FGMA - Glazing and Sealant Manual.

D. Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association (SIGMA): 1. SIGMA Manual


A. Glass and glazing materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: 1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900 and 08410. 2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass

pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.

B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with applicable code acting inwardly or outwardly without exceeding deflection limits.

C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing

materials, whichever is less.

D. Thermal Movement: Provide thermal expansion and contraction movement capability, resulting from minimum ambient temperature range through 120 degrees F which may cause curtain wall material temperature range through 180 degrees F.

08800 - 2

E. Condensation: Prevent excessive condensation of interior faces of work when heating and ventilation system is in operation under the following conditions: 1. Outdoor ambient temperature: 0 degrees F and 15 mph wind. 2. Indoor ambient temperature: 75 degrees F at 25% relative humidity. 3. Excessive condensation is defined as visible water, ice, fog, or frost on more

than 10% of any entrance storefront or curtain wall module, or accumulation or uncontrolled flow of water from condensation on such module at any location.

F. Labels:

1. Label each piece of glass with manufacturer's label identifying kind and quality of glass.

2. Paper, or other removable type labels, affixed to any inaccessible surface of insulating glass units are unacceptable.

3. Permanently label each piece of safety glazing in accordance with requirements of regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.


A. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual and Manufacturer's recommendations for glazing installation methods.


A. Material Delivery and Storage: 1. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with protective

interleaves between lights. 2. Store materials with interleaving and labels intact, in cool, clean, dry area where

temperatures are above dew point. 3. Protect from weather with tarpaulin or ventilated plastic coverings.

B. Material Handling:

1. Handle to avoid damage to glass surfaces, avoid bumping corners, and keep free of finger prints, grease stains, smears, and contamination by materials capable of staining glass.

2. Remove from Site all broken, cracked, scratched, or otherwise damaged or

imperfect material. 3. Unpack glass in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 4. Do not remove labels until final clean-up.

1.06 PROTECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. 2. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after

installation of glazing compounds. B. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

08800 - 3

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of tempered glass with drawings and as required by local governing codes and requirements.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide three year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700. 1. Include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or

misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Glass Manufacturers: 1. Guardian. 2. Libby - Owens - Ford Glass Company. 3. Pittsburgh Plate Glass Company.


2.02 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, 1/4 inch thick.

B. Safety Glass: Clear fully tempered conforming to ANSI Z97.1; 1/4 inch thick. 2.03 SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Single component, non-bleeding, non staining; cured with Shore A hardness of 15-25; color as selected; Proglaze as manufactured by Tremco.

2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x

one half height of glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Splines: Resilient extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot.

D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

08800 - 4

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify prepared openings under provisions of Section 01039.

B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

3.03 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.

B. Inspection will monitor quality of glazing. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Glass and glazing product manufacturers shall provide field surveillance of installation of their products as required.

B. Monitor and report installation procedures, unacceptable conditions.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.

B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

C. Remove labels after work is complete.

D. Clean glass.


A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.

B. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

END OF SECTION

09110 - 1

SECTION 09110 NON-LOAD BEARING METAL FRAMING


A. Section Includes: 1. Formed metal stud framing at interior partition locations. 2. Framing accessories.


1. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing 2. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Insulation within stud framing. 3. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A591 - Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM C645 - Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track) and Rigid

Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 3. ASTM C 754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached

Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.

C. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc-Chromate, Alkyd Type.

D. Gypsum Association (GA):

1. GA 203 - Installation of Screw-Type Steel Framing Members to Receive Gypsum Board.

E. Metal Lath and Steel Framing Association (ML/SFA):

1. ML/SFA Specifications. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Non-load bearing metal stud framing system for interior walls, with batt type acoustic insulation specified in Section 07210, and gypsum board specified in Section 09250.

B. Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1/270 span. C. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building

structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

09110 - 2


A. Perform work in accordance with GA 203 and ASTM C754. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence work with other work directly affected by this Section.

B. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.

C. Coordinate work of related Sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. National Gypsum Co. 2. Dietrich Metal Framing. 3. U.S. Gypsum Co.


2.02 STUD FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Studs: ASTM A591/C645, electrogalvanized, non-load bearing rolled steel, channel shaped, punched for utility access, as scheduled: 1. Width: 3½ or 6 inches as indicated on drawings. 2. Thickness: 25 gauge except 20 gauge where indicated in ASTM C754.

B. Runners: Of same material and finish as studs, bent leg retainer notched to receive

studs with provision for crimp locking to stud. Ceiling runners with extended legs.

C. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material and finish as studs, thickness to suit purpose.

D. Fasteners: GA 203. Self-drilling, self-tapping screws.

E. Metal Backing: 20 gauge galvanized steel for reinforcement and backings of wall

mounted items. Verify loads prior to installation of backing. F. Anchorage Devices: Drilled expansion bolts.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections to sizes and profiles required; with framing members fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit Contract Document design requirements.

B. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.

09110 - 3


A. Verify that conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Verify field measurements are as instructed by manufacturer.

C. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location.

D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 ERECTION

A. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 16 inches oc.

B. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs.

C. Install studs vertically at 16 inches oc.

D. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method.

E. Stud splicing not permissible.

F. Construct corners using minimum three studs.

G. Double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs, and not more than 2 inches

each side of openings.

H. Brace stud framing system and make rigid.

I. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door and window frame supports and attachments.

J. Align stud web openings.

K. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, and blocking with electrical and mechanical

work to be placed in or behind stud framing.

L. Blocking: Secure wood blocking to studs.

M. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners.

N. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after

stud framing erection.

09110 - 4

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From True Position: 1/8 inch.

B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/16 inch. END OF SECTION

09250 - 1

SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD


A. Section Includes: 1. Gypsum board. 2. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 3. Gypsum board accessories.

B. Related Work:

1. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing. 2. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Thermal and acoustic insulation. 3. Section 07900 - Sealants. 4. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. 5. Section 09110 - Non-Load Bearing Wall Framing. 6. Section 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings. 7. Section 09900 - Painting.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. 2. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard. 3. ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. 4. ASTM C646 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Sheet Material to

Light Gage Steel Studs.

B. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. GA-201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings 2. GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of

Gypsum Board. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in gypsum board work with 3 years documented experience.


A. Acceptable gypsum board system manufacturers: 1. Georgia Pacific. 2. National Gypsum Company. 3. U.S. Gypsum Company.


09250 - 2

2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Face Panels: ASTM C 36. Long edges tapered and round or beveled. Type "X" gypsum core, 5/8-inch thick.

B. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible

length; ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges. 2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustical Insulation: Refer to Section 07210.

B. Corner Beads: Metal.

C. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA216, type as required.

D. Joint Materials: GA 201 and GA 216; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners.

E. Wall Channel: Aluminum end wall closure. Color shall match storefront.

F. Sealants: Polyisobutylene Mastic, and Acrylic-Latex.

G. Gypsum Board Metal Trim:

1. Material: 26 gauge galvanized steel. 2. External Corner Beads: U.S. Gypsum Dur-A-Bead Corner. 3. Edge Trim: U.S. Gypsum #200 Series to form corners and edges as required. 4. Control Joint: U.S. Gypsum Co. Control Joint No. 093 for use at all exterior

canopy soffit joint conditions as shown on the drawings.

H. Fasteners: Screws, ASTM C 646.

I. Wall Texture: Smooth Finish. J. Ceiling Texture: Smooth Finish.


A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install gypsum board in accordance with Uniform Building Code and manufacturer's instructions.

09250 - 3

B. Single layer standard gypsum board: Erect in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

C. Exterior gypsum soffit board: Erect perpendicular to supports, with staggered end

joints over supports.

D. Fasteners: 1. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 2. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to wood furring or framing. 3. Use screws when fastening accessories. 4. Staples may only be used when securing the first layer of double layer

applications.

E. Joint Sealers: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum ceiling board with sealant.

F. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as

indicated. G. Corner Beads: Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length.

Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. 3.03 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes.

B. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. C. Erect in accordance with Contract Documents, reviewed Shop Drawings and

manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.

END OF SECTION

09511 - 1

SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


A. Section Includes: 1. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. 2. Acoustical tile. 3. Non-fire rated assembly. 4. Perimeter trim.

5. Contractor designed structural connections and anchorages to meet seismic requirements.


1. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 2. Division 15 - Mechanical: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. 3. Division 16 - Electrical: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 4. Appendix A – NWCB Technical Document 401

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel

Ceilings. 2. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical

Tile and Lay-in Panels. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Installed System: 1. System shall be designed to meet Zone 3 seismic requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling tile with three years minimum documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company with three years minimum documented experience

and approved by manufacturer.

C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assembly and combustibility

requirements for materials. 2. Conform to all local seismic requirements.


A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation, unless otherwise recommended by

09511 - 2

manufacturer.

1.06 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.

B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.

1.07 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide extra quantity of acoustic units under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Provide minimum 3% of total tile area installed to Owner. Furnish in full, unopened cartons, with original labels intact and legible.


A. Acceptable Suspension System Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong. 2. U.S.G. Interiors. 3. Chicago.

B. Acceptable Acoustic Unit Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong. 2. Celotex under provisions of Section 01600. 3. U.S.G. Interiors. 4. Donn.

C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.02 EXPOSED GRID SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty, no deflection in excess of 1/360 of the span or .133 inch (1/8 inch in 14-foot span).

B. Main Runners: 1-1/2 inch minimum height, double web design and rectangular bulb,

15/16 inch exposed flange, hanger wire holes at 2 inch o.c., 12'-0" long, .015 inch minimum thickness, integral reversible splice and expansion notch for controlled buckling.

C. Cross tees 1-1/8 inch minimum height, double web design and a rectangular bulb,

16/16 inch exposed lange, 4'-0" long, .015 inch minimum thickness.

D. Coatings: As required for normal use environments with white painted finish on exposed runners, comply with ASTM C 635.

09511 - 3

E. Wall Moldings: Angle with hemmed edges finished to match exposed runners.

F. Other Edge Conditions: All edges including columns to have angle brackets for T-bar and ceiling tile support.

G. Hanger Wire: #12 gauge galvanized steel wire.

H. Attachment Devises: Manufacturer approved type capable of carrying 5 times the

ceiling load.

I. Hold-Down Clips: As required by local codes, provide by suspended ceiling system manufacturer.

2.03 ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS

A. Acoustic Panels: Conforming to following: 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inches. 3. Composition: Mineral. 4. Light Reflectance: LR1. 5. NRC Range: .55 to .65. 6. STC Range: 35 to 39. 7. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame / Spread 25. 8. Edge: Square. 9. Surface Color: White. 10. Surface Finish: Non-directional fissured. 11. Style: ‘Cortega’ Square Lay-in 12. Texture: Medium


A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Lateral Bracing: Provide all internal bracing and struts as required by the Latest Edition of the Uniform Building Code and local building code requirements.

B. Install system in accordance with Contract Documents, local seismic requirements,

ASTM C636 and manufacturer's instructions, and as supplemented in this Section.

C. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to deflection of 1/360 maximum.

D. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers

09511 - 4

with other work.

E. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest

affected hangers to span extra distance.

G. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.

H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently.

I. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.

J. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest

practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions.

K. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function.

L. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.

M. If required by codes, install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system as recommended by manufacturer.

N. If fixtures cause excessive deflection, the fixture shall be independently supported or

the grid shall be supplementally supported within 6-inches of each corner with hanger wire.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 14 ft. END OF SECTION

09660-1

SECTION 09660

RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 THIS SECTION INCLUDES

A. Flooring and accessories as shown on the drawings and schedules and as indicated by the requirements of this section.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract (including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 sections) apply to the work of this section.


A. Other Division 9 sections for floor finishes related to this section but not the work of this section.

B. Division 3 Concrete

C. Division 6 Wood and Plastics

D. Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Select an installer who is competent in the installation of Armstrong resilient tile flooring.

B. If required, provide types of flooring and accessories supplied by one manufacturer, including leveling and patching compounds, and adhesives.

C. If required, provide flooring material to meet the following fire test performance criteria as tested by a recognized independent testing laboratory:

a. ASTM E 648 Critical Radiant Flux of 0.45 watts per sq. cm. or greater, Class I.

b. ASTM E 662 (Smoke Generation) Maximum Specific Optical Density of 450 or less.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, seaming plan, coving details, and manufacturer's technical data, installation and maintenance instructions (latest edition of "Armstrong Guaranteed Installation System," F-5061) for flooring and accessories.

B. Submit the manufacturer's standard samples showing the required colors for flooring and applicable accessories.

C. If required, submit the manufacturer's certification that the flooring has been tested by an independent laboratory and complies with the required fire tests.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Deliver materials in good condition to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original unopened containers that bear the name and brand of the manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry, enclosed space off the ground, and protected from

09660-2

the weather and from extremes of heat and cold. Protect adhesives from freezing. Store flooring, adhesives and accessories in the spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation.

C. Maintain a minimum temperature in the spaces to receive the flooring and accessories of 65ºF (18ºC) and a maximum temperature of 100ºF (38ºC) for at least 48 hours before, during, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Thereafter, maintain a minimum temperature of 55ºF (13ºC) in areas where work is completed. Protect all materials from the direct flow of heat from hot-air registers, radiators, or other heating fixtures and appliances.

D. Install flooring and accessories after the other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Close spaces to traffic during the installation of the flooring. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until they are sufficiently dry to achieve a bond with the adhesive, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture tests.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING MATERIALS

A. RF-1: Natural Creations Tile Flooring manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc., in ‘Mortar’, having a nominal total thickness of 1/8", 12”x24”

B. RF-2: Nature’s Path plank laminate flooring, manufactured by Mannington, Color: Cherry Merlot 12107.

2.02 WALL BASE MATERIALS

A. Provide1/8 in. thick, Burke/Mercer Burke base Type TS Rubber Wall Base with a

matte finish, RB-1: 4” Straight at carpet flooring; Color: 663 “Sky Gray”. RB-2: 4”

Cove at vinyl flooring; Color: 663 “Sky Gray”. RB-3: 6” Cove at sheet flooring. Color:

663 “Sky Gray”. RB-4: 6” Straight at Clothing Pad flooring. Color: 701 “Black”

2.03 ADHESIVES

A. For Tile Installation System, Full Spread: Provide Armstrong Resilient Tile Adhesive under the tile and Armstrong S-725 Wall Base Adhesive at the wall base as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.

B. For Tile Installation System, Tile On: Provide Armstrong Resilient Tile Adhesive under the tile over smooth, completely bonded existing resilient flooring and Armstrong S-725 Wall Base Adhesive at the wall base as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. For patching, smoothing, and leveling monolithic subfloors (concrete, terrazzo, quarry tile, ceramic tile, and certain metals) as recommended by flooring manufacturer and installer.

B. For sealing joints between the top of wall base or integral cove cap and irregular wall surfaces such as masonry, provide plastic filler applied according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Provide transition/reducing strips tapered to meet abutting materials. Color: 663 Sky Gray, including #365 Cerco Edge T at clothing pad area.

09660-3

D. Provide threshold of thickness and width as shown on the drawings.

E. Provide resilient edge strips of width shown on the drawings, of equal gauge to the flooring, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, with color to match or contrast with the flooring, or as selected by the Architect from standard colors available.

F. Provide metal edge strips of width shown on the drawings and of required thickness to protect exposed edges of the flooring. Provide units of maximum available length to minimize the number of joints. Use butt-type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage, or overlap-type metal edge strips for exposed anchorage. Unless otherwise shown, provide strips made of extruded aluminum with a mill finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, and other defects that might prevent adhesive bond or impair durability or appearance of the flooring material.

B. Inspect subfloors prior to installation to determine that surfaces are free from curing, sealing, parting and hardening compounds; residual adhesives; adhesive removers; and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. Visually inspect for evidence of moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, dusting, mold, or mildew.

C. Report conditions contrary to contract requirements that would prevent a proper installation. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. Failure to call attention to defects or imperfections will be construed as acceptance and approval of the subfloor. Installation indicates acceptance of substrates with regard to conditions existing at the time of installation.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Smooth concrete surfaces, removing rough areas, projections, ridges, and bumps, and filling low spots, control or construction joints, and other defects with Armstrong Patch and Underlayment as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.

B. Remove paint, varnish, oils, release agents, sealers, and waxes. Remove residual adhesives as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. Remove curing and hardening compounds not compatible with the adhesives used, as indicated by a bond test or by the compound manufacturer's recommendations for flooring. Avoid organic solvents.

C. Perform subfloor Calcium Chloride Tests (and Bond Tests) as described in publication F-5061, "Armstrong Guaranteed Installation System," to determine if surfaces are dry; free of curing and hardening compounds, old adhesive, and other coatings; and ready to receive flooring.

D. Vacuum or broom-clean surfaces to be covered immediately before the application of flooring. Make subfloor free from dust, dirt, grease, and all foreign materials.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF TILE FLOORING

09660-4

A. Install flooring in strict accordance with the latest edition of "Armstrong Guaranteed Installation System", F-5061.

B. Install flooring wall to wall before the installation of floor-set cabinets, casework, furniture, equipment, movable partitions, etc. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door recesses, closets, and similar openings as shown on the drawings.

C. If required, install flooring on pan-type floor access covers. Maintain continuity of color and pattern within pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Adhere flooring to the subfloor around covers and to covers.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit to permanent fixtures, columns, walls, partitions, pipes, outlets, and built-in furniture and cabinets.

E. Install flooring with adhesives, tools, and procedures in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Observe the recommended adhesive trowel notching, open times, and working times.


A. Apply top set wall base to walls, columns, casework, and other permanent fixtures in areas where top-set base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practical, with inside corners fabricated from base materials that are mitered or coped. Tightly bond base to vertical substrate with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.

B. Fill voids with plastic filler along the top edge of the resilient wall base or integral cove cap on masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates.

C. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring, and secure with adhesive recommended by the edge strip manufacturer. Install edge strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.

D. Apply edge strips where shown on the drawings, after flooring installation. Secure units to the substrate, complying with the edge strip manufacturer's recommendations.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Perform initial maintenance according to the latest edition of "Armstrong Guaranteed Installation System," F-5061.

B. Protect installed flooring as recommended by the flooring manufacturer against damage from rolling loads, other trades, or the placement of fixtures and furnishings. (See Finishing The Job in "Armstrong Guaranteed Installation System," F-5061.)

END OF SECTION

09671-1

SECTION 09671 TEXTURED FLOOR COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surface preparation.

B. Textured Floor Coatings.


A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete Surface coordination and curing provisions.

B. Section 07140 - Fluid Applied Waterproofing.

C. Section 09660 - High performance Urethane Coating: Seal-Krete two part urethane coating.

D. Section 09670 - Horizontal Sealers: Seal-Krete floor sealers.

E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D 1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes.

B. OTC Compliant - Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Volatile Organic Compound s Regulations for Paints.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

E. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


09671-2

A. Regulatory Requirements: Product shall comply with federal, state, and local volatile organic compounds (VOC) regulations.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: All products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. Finish areas designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and

sheen are approved by Architect. 3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 4. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for remaining Work

E. Pre-Installation Meeting: 1. Convene at job site seven calendar days prior to scheduled beginning

of construction activities of this section to review requirements of this section.

2. Require attendance by representatives of the following: a. Sealer manufacturer. b. Installer of this section. c. Other entities directly affecting, or affected by, construction

activities of this section. 3. Notify Architect four calendar days in advance of scheduled meeting

date.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of materials in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

B. Do not apply coatings to surfaces below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or above 95 degrees F (48 degrees C) unless recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Do not apply when rain is predicted within 24 hours or less than 1 day after surface has been wet.

D. Do not apply in high or gusty winds.

09671-3

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

B. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver materials to the Owner.

C. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an addition three percent, but not less than 1 gallon (3.8 l) or one case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Seal-Krete, A Division of Convenience Products, which is located at: 306 Gandy Rd. ; Auburndale, FL 33823; Toll Free Tel: 800-323-7357; Tel: 863-967-1535; Email: request info ([email protected]); Web: www.seal-krete.com

B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Granitex Brush & Roll: A two coat system with a textured base coat and a stone finish coat that produces a decorative natural stone finish for concrete or primed metal. 1. Textured Base Coat Technical Data:

a. Finish: Matte to low Satin. b. Volume Solids: 42 percent. c. Weight Solids: 53 percent. d. VOC Actual: 72 g/l. e. VOC (EPA Method #24): 164 g/l. f. Odor: Very Low. g. Recommended spread rate (per coat):

1) Wet mils: 15. 2) Dry mils: 8.

2. GraniTex Natural Stone Finish Coat Technical Data: a. Finish: Matte to low satin. b. Color:

1) GrayStone. c. Volume Solids: 47 percent. d. Weight Solids: 54 percent. e. VOC Actual: 79 g/L. f. VOC (EPA Method #24): 142 g/L. g. Odor: Very low. h. Recommended spread rate (per coat):

1) Wet mils: 15. 2) Dry mils: 8.

3. GraniTex Performance: a. Adhesion to Concrete 400 psi.

09671-4

b. Taber Abrasion: Excellent. c. Meets ADA requirements for non-slip surfaces. d. Chemical Resistance when tested in accordance with ASTM D

1308 (1 hour spot test).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify that substrates are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the materials specified and for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Protect adjacent surfaces to prevent accidental application to surfaces not indicated to receive sealer; remove accidental applications from surfaces immediately, following manufacturer's instructions.

D. Surfaces must be structurally sound, thoroughly cleaned, dry and free from dust, dirt, oils, glossy or loose paint, glue, surface sealer and other contaminants.

E. Concrete must have cured for a minimum of 30 days before application. Etch the surface with SEAL-KRETE Clean-N-Etch concrete etching solution to allow for proper penetration and adhesion. After etching, rinse the surface thoroughly and let dry. If muriatic acid is used, it must be neutralized before proceeding. Test surface for immediate water penetration before proceeding.

F. Previously sealed, stained or painted concrete: Remove loose or peeling paint and degloss surface by sanding with 150-200 grit paper. Follow with a general cleaning. Rinse thoroughly and let dry. Remove oil stains with SEAL-KRETE OSR.

G. Bare metal must be primed using a direct-to-metal primer.

H. Wood must be sanded to remove any surface contaminates and to assure good adhesion. A test patch of urethane coating is recommended to ensure proper adhesion.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply textured coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

09671-5

B. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of texture perpendicular to the preceding coat unless specified otherwise.

C. Spray apply the finish coat as recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Roller apply the finish coat as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly prior to applying a second or finish coat

3.4 CLEAN-UP

A. Immediately remove coatings that fall on surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be coated.

B. Remove temporary coverings and protection of surrounding areas and surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged surfaces before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

09688 - 1

SECTION 09688 CARPET

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes carpet direct-glued to substrates and accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Section 03350 – Concrete Finishing. 3. Section 09660 – Resilient Flooring 4. Section 16 – Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM D2859 - Test Method for Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials.

B. ASTM E648 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

C. CRI 104 (Carpet and Rug Institute) - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials. Installation crew must be CRI tested and approved.

D. NFPA 253 (National Fire Protection Association) - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and pattern, and location of edge moldings and edge bindings.

C. Samples: 1. Submit three (3) samples 9 x 9 inch (229 x 229 mm) in size illustrating color

and pattern for each carpet material specified, including sample of edge binding.

2. Submit three (3), 12-inch (304.8-mm) long samples of edge strip.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

09688 - 2

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience and approved by carpet manufacturer.


A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Store materials in area of installation for 72 hours prior to installation.

C. Maintain minimum 70 degrees (21 degrees C) ambient temperature 3 days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation.

D. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 3 days after installation.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Supply five percent (5%) of carpet of each type, color, and pattern specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS

A. Carpet Type CPT-1: 1. Manufacturer: Mohawk 2. Style: Canyon Clay 3. Color name: Belmont 4. Product Type: Tile

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler: Cementitious, type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.

B. Moldings and Edge Strips: Rubber, color to coordinate with flooring.

C. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.

D. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material and recommended by carpet manufacturer.

E. Edge binding tape: Recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 03350

09688 - 3

and are ready to receive work.

C. Verify concrete floors are ready for carpet installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity. Obtain instructions when test results are not within specified limits.

1. Moisture emission rate: Verify emission rate meets Manufacturer’s

requirements for each product. 2. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9.

D. Moisture emission rate in concrete floors shall meet manufacturer’s recommendation for installation. Allow appropriate time for moisture testing and floor preparation to meet manufacturer’s requirements. Means and methods to ensure compliance are part of the contractor’s responsibility. No additional cost or time shall be provided to the contractor to ensure compliance.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler.

B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

C. Vacuum clean substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install carpet in accordance with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.

C. Material must be visually inspected by installer prior to installation. Notify Architect if imperfections are found.

D. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with CRI 104 section 7.2 shop drawings: 1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and

parallel to main traffic. 2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings. 3. Align run of pile in same direction as noted on drawings and in same direction

on adjacent pieces. 4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. 5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within each contiguous

area.

E. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with uniform appearance.

F. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.

09688 - 4

G. Fabricate stair carpet runners with hand-sewn borders and seams, and edge bind.

H. Direct Glue-Down Installation: CRI 104 Section 8. 1. Apply adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer.

After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive. 2. Apply seam adhesive. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight, not overlapped

or peaked, and free of gaps. 3. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet

backing, as recommended by carpet manufacturer.

I. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.

J. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. Bind cut edges where not concealed by edge strips.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces.

C. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Protecting installed construction.

B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.

C. Cover carpeting in traffic areas with protective non-staining building paper. Do not use plastic sheeting.

END OF SECTION

09900 – 1

SECTION 09900 PAINTING


A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation. 2. Interior and exterior painting and finishing. 3. Surface finish schedule. 4. Color selection schedule.


1. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. 2. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication: Shop primed items. 3. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. 4. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. 5. Section 08210 - Wood Doors. 6. Section 08305 - Access Doors. 7. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board. 8. Section 09671 - Texture Floor Coatings 9. Division 15 - Mechanical Identification. 10. Division 16 - Electrical Identification.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and

Related Products. 1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: Submit three samples 8 x 8 inch in size illustrating range of colors available for each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with minimum three years documented experience, and approved by product manufacturer.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating

09900 – 2

requirements for finishes. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to site, store and protect under provisions of Section 01600.

B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.

C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a

maximum of 90 degrees F in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.


A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above

50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

D. Provide lighting level as required at substrate surface.

1.08 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide two gallon containers of each exterior and interior color to Owner.

B. Label each container with color, room locations, and exterior location in addition to the manufacturer's label.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore

B. Substitutions: Not Allowed

C. Products for each general purpose shall be by single manufacturer. Do not use products by different manufacturers over one another, except for shop prime coats

09900 – 3

specified in other Sections. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Coatings: 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste

consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous coating.

2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials

not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Refer to schedule at end of Section and drawings for surface finish and color schedule.

B. Allow 15% extra paint, or as required, for deep tone colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report

any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following

maximums as recommended by the manufacturer

D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.

C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.

D. Impervious Surfaces:

1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. 2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

E. Gypsum Board Surfaces:

09900 – 4

1. Latex fill minor defects. 2. Spot prime defects after repair.

F. Galvanized Surfaces:

1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. 2. Apply coat of etching primer.

G. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish:

1. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. 2. Remove oil and grease with solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and

allow to dry. 3. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium

metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. 4. Allow to dry.

H. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces:

1. Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. 2. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or

sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. 3. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts

are similarly cleaned. 4. Spot prime paint after repairs.

I. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: 1. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. 2. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.

3. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. J. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish:

1. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. 2. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. 3. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried. 4. Sand between coats.

K. Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.

B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.

C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces.

D. Remove empty paint containers from site.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

09900 – 5

B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

C. Apply each coat to uniform finish.

D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise

approved.

E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.

G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.

3.05 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally.

B. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone

equipment before installing equipment. C. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to

finishing. D. Paint all exterior exposed mechanical and electrical equipment color as selected by

Architect. 3.06 CLEANING

A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.

B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris.

C. Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed

metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.07 SCHEDULE - SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING

A. Metal Fabrications, Section 05500 and Flashing and Sheet Metal, Section 07600. 3.08 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES

A. Painted Unit Masonry: 1. Provide finishes as described in Section 07120 - Fluid Applied Elastomeric

Waterproofing.

B. Synthetic Plaster: 1. Provide finishes as described in Section 07240 - EIFS.

09900 – 6

C. Wood - Painted:

1. Latex.

D. Wood - Transparent 1. Two coats varnish.

E. Pavement Markings

1. Two coats yellow or white as indicated on drawings.

F. Concrete 1. One coat primer sealer latex. 2. Two coats latex.

G. Steel - Unprimed

1. One coat zinc chromate primer. 2. Two coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss.

H. Steel - Shop Primed

1. Touch-up with zinc rich primer. 2. Two coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss.

I. Steel - Galvanized (not chain link mesh)

1. One coat zinc chromate primer. 2. Two coats Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, semi-gloss.

J. Aluminum - Factory Finish

3.09 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES COATING REQUIREMENTS

A. Wood - Painted 1. One coat latex prime sealer. 2. Two coats latex, semi-gloss.

B. Wood - Transparent

1. Filler coat (for open grained wood only). 2. Two coats, varnish, semi-gloss.

C. Concrete, Concrete Block, Cement Plaster.

1. One coat block filler. 2. One coat primer sealer latex. 3. Two coat latex, semi-gloss.

D. Exposed Steel - Unprimed.

1. One coat zinc chromate primer. 2. Two coats latex, semi-gloss.

E. Exposed Steel - Primed

1. Touch-up with original primer. 2. Two coats latex, semi-gloss.

09900 – 7

F. Unexposed Steel - Unprimed 1. One coat zinc rich primer.

G. Unexposed Steel - Primed

1. Touch-up with original primer.

H. Steel - Galvanized 1. One coat zinc chromate primer. 2. Two coats Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall, semi-gloss.

I. Concrete Flooring

1. See Drawings and Section 09671 J. Gypsum Board

1. One coat latex primer sealer. 2. Two coats latex semi-gloss.

3.10 SCHEDULE – See Drawings for Schedule and Locations

END OF SECTION

09975 - 1

SECTION 09975 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide installation of fiber-reinforced panels (FRP) and fiber-reinforced laminates (FRL) as indicated on Drawings and specified herein.

B. Fiberglass reinforced panels shall be installed over 5/8" moisture resistant gypsum

board in all conditions. 1.02 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Rough Carpentry: Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing. B. Caulking: Section 07900 - Joint Sealants.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Codes and Standards: To applicable codes. Flamespread not in excess of 20 feet, fuel contributed O, smoke developed 200 per ASTM E-84, Class A. 1. Industry Standard, WM4-77, Standard Wood.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


1. Provide product data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories. 2. Submit manufacturers Installation Instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Panolam Industries International 888-375-9255. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.01 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS (FRP and FRL)

A. Provide and install full height panels over gypsum board backing as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Prefinished Panels:

1. FRP: Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels, “Embossed Finish”, .075" thick, as manufactured by Panolam Industries. Classic Collection, Color: Gray.

2. FRL: Fiberglass reinforced laminate panels, “Pionite Laminate Finish”, as manufactured by Panolam Industries. Color: Pionite “Cradle of Liberty AB221”.

09975 - 2

C. Moldings: 1. Furnish prefinished harmonizing PVC moldings to match panels for all joints and

exposed edges. D. Adhesives: Construction Adhesive #4319 by Franklin Adhesives or equal approved by

panel manufacturer. E. Joint Caulking: Color Sil by Color Rite or equal approved by panel manufacturer; 100

percent silicone based colored caulking. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install FRP and FRL as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that all such work is sufficiently complete to complete the installation of the work of this Section. 2. Comply with manufacturers published instructions. Have all recommended tools on hand and make a room layout and cutting schedule before starting installation. 3. Cut, fit, and try each panel prior to final fastening. Spread adhesive, set, and press panels in place, brace as recommended. 4. Install panels full height to bottom of ceiling in Dog Bathing. All other areas per Drawings. 5. Clean panels, trim and moldings.

B. Install plumb, level, true, and straight. Shim as required. C. Cut to fit, scribe where necessary.

END OF SECTION

10160 - 1

SECTION 10160 METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS


A. Section Includes: 1. Porcelain Sheet Steel toilet compartments, floor mounted, head rail

braced. 2. Urinal screens wall mounted floor supported.


1. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: In wall framing and plates for partition panel support.

2. Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/American Society for Testing and Materials

(ANSI/ASTM): 1. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities

Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ANSI/ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip

Process, Commercial Quality. 3. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate,

Sheet and Strip.

B. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. FS RR-P-1352 - Partitions, Toilet, Complete.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate on Shop Drawings, partition plan and elevation views,

dimensions, details of floor supports, and door swings.

C. Samples: Submit two samples 2x3 inches in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS AND COLORS:

A. Manufacturer: Global Steel Products: Embassy; Charcoal #2123 2.02 TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: Floor anchored type with anti-grip headrail brace, flush

10160 - 2

panel with powder coated finish. 2.03 STANDARDS

A. As required within the Americans Disability Act (A.D.A.) for public restrooms. 2.04 MATERIALS:

A. Metal Compartments and Screens: 1. Material and Finishes:

a. Partition, Pilaster and Door Material: Cold-rolled, stretcher leveled steel 22 ga at panel faces and 18 ga at pilaster faces.

b. Protective Coating: ASTM A-164, 0.00015 inch thick zinc coating applied to all surfaces.

c. Finishes: Powder Coated. d. Color: Royal Blue #2135 d. Pilaster Base Material: Stainless steel. e. Fittings Material: All fittings to be same material and finish.

2. Compartments: a. Panel Type: Flush. b. Support: Floor supported with Anti-grip headrail brace. c. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel.

3. Dimensions: a. Refer to Drawings.

4. Screens: a. Include wall supported, floor mounted urinal screens where

indicated. Appearance: Match compartments.

B. Hardware:

1. For all hardware finish shall be stainless steel. 2. Fasteners:

a. Material: Corrosion-resistant. b. Finish: Match fittings.

C. Reinforcement:

1. Material: 12 ga. steel. 2. Extent of Work: Provide where necessary to receive anchors for grab

bars and other attached equipment. Verify locations. D. Fabrication:

1. Accurately form metal to required sizes and shapes. Grind and dress any welds to form smooth, flush surfaces. Do not use metallic fillers to conceal defects.

E. Internal Reinforcement: Provide in areas of attached hardware and fittings. Mark

locations of reinforcement for partition mounted washroom accessories.

F. Factory Finishing: 1. Clean panels as recommended by manufacturer.

10160 - 3


A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures.

C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing, where required.

D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Set units with not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels, not more than 1" between panels and walls, and not more than 3/16" between pilasters and doors.

B. Hardware Adjustments: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation after

installation: 1. Set hinges on in-swing doors to hold doors open approximately 30

degrees from the closed position when unlatched. 2. Set hinges on out-swing doors to hold doors closed when unlatched.

C. Install work secure, plumb, and level in accordance with Contract Documents,

reviewed Shop Drawings and manufacturers instructions.

D. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters.

E. Attach continuous panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.

F. Attach panels and pilasters to bracket with through sleeve tamper-proof bolts and

nuts. Locate headrail joints at pilaster center lines.

G. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles integral with pilaster. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Perform final adjustments to leveling devices.

B. Clean exposed surfaces and touch up minor finish imperfections using materials and methods recommended by partition manufacturer.

C. Replace damaged products which cannot be satisfactorily field repaired as

directed by Owner or Architect.

10160 - 4

D. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge not exceeding 3/16 inch.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove protective maskings. Clean surfaces.

B. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted.

C. Replace damaged or scratched materials and with new materials. END OF SECTION

10522 - 1

SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES


A. Section Includes: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA): 1. ANSI/NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.

B. American National Standards Institute/Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (ANSI/UL):

1. ANSI/UL 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers.


A. Provide units conforming to ANSI/UL requirements.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code and local jurisdictional requirements of location, quantity, and type of extinguishers.


A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Amerex. 2. J.L. Industries.


2.02 FINISHES

A. Extinguisher: Steel, enamel to red color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to application of substrate, verify placement of adequate blocking for support of wall mounted items.

10522 - 2

B. Verify wall openings under provisions of Section 01600.

C. Install in locations as diirected by Fire Marshall.

END OF SECTION

APPENDIX A

APPENDX A

NORTHWEST WALL & CEILING BUREAU TECHNICAL DOCUMENT 401

General Recommendations• Referenced sources per hierarchy: 2006 IBC (International Building Code),

American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM C 635, ASTM C 636), Ameri-can Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE 7-05) and Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA).

• Partitions that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced to the structure. Bracing shall be independent of the ceiling splay bracing system. Source IBC section 1621.1.2

• For further information on bracing of non-load bearing partitions refer to NWCB technical document #201.

• All main beams are to be Heavy Duty (HD). Source ASCE 7-05 item 9.6.2.6.2.2a

• All cross tees shall be capable of carrying the design load without exceeding deflection equal to 1/360 of its span. Source CISCA zones 3-4

• These recommendations are intended for suspended ceilings including grid, panel or tile, light fixtures and air terminals weighing no more the 4 lbs. per square foot. Source

ASCE 7-05 item 9.6.2.6.1

• All wire ties are to be three tight turns around itself within three inches. Twelve gage Hanger wire spaced 4 foot on center (figure 1). Source ASTM C 636 item 2.3.4

• Changes in ceiling planes will require posi-tive bracing. Source ASCE 7-05 Section 9.6.2.6.2.2. item f.

maximum 3"(76mm)

Suspension Systems for Acoustical Lay-in Ceilings

FIELD TECHNICAL INFORMATIONApplication recommendations for work at the wall or ceiling

401 OREGON

REVISED 4/07

This document has been reviewed by

the State of Oregon, Building Codes

Division. In all buildings, other than

structures classified as occupancy

category III and IV, suspended ceilings

installed in accordance with the

prescriptive provisions of the

401-OREGON document are deemed

by the State of Oregon, Building

Codes Division to comply with the

statewide code interpretation.

This document provides the IBC-

referenced standards for the instal-

lation of suspension systems for

acoustical lay-in ceilings. Incorpora-

tion of this document will provide a

more uniform standard for installation

and inspection. This document is

designed to accomplish the intent of

the International Building Code (IBC)

with regard to the requirements for

seismic design category D, E and F for

suspended ceilings and related items.

Unless supported by engineering, the

suspension system shall be installed

per the requirements for Seismic De-

sign Category (SDC) D, E and F per

the IBC. Manufacturers’ recommen-

dations should be followed.

NORTHWEST WALL & CEILING BUREAU SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN CEILINGS

figure 1

Lateral Force Bracing (figures 2 and 3)

• Ceilings constructed of lath and plaster or gypsum board, screw or nail attached to suspended members that support a ceiling on one level extending from wall to wall shall be exempt from the lateral force bracing requirements. Source: CISCA zones 3-4

• Lateral force bracing is the use of vertical struts (compression posts) and splay wires (see figure 2).

• Lateral force bracing is required for ceilings over 144 square feet and not required for ceilings less than 144 square feet provided they are surrounded by four walls and braced to structure. Source: State of Oregon, Building Codes Divsion

• Lateral Force Bracing shall be 12 feet on center (maximum) and begin no farther than 6 feet from walls. Source: CISCA Seismic zones 3-4

• Seismic splay wires are to be four 12 gage wires attached to the main beam. Wires are arrayed 90° from each other and at an angle not exceeding 45° from the plane of the ceiling. Source: CISCA Seismic zones 3-4

• Seismic splay wires shall be attached to the grid and to the structure in such a manner that they can support a design load of not less than 200 pounds or the actual design load, with a safety factor of 2, whichever is greater (figure 6b). Source: CISCA zones 3-4

• “Powder driven shot-in-anchors” when used for seismic application as part of the prescriptive path in Seismic Design Categories D, E and F shall have an ICC-ES approval for seismic applications and shall require “special inspection” irrespective of the type of occupancy category the structure is in. Anchors for kicker wires (splayed wires installed for purposes other than seismic restraint) are exempt from this requirement. Source: State of Oregon, Building Codes Division

• Splay wires are to be within 2 inches of the connection of the vertical strut to suspended ceiling. Source: CISCA Seismic zones 3-4

• Rigid bracing may be used in lieu of splay wires. Source: ASCE section 9.6.2.6.2.2

• Ceilings with plenums less than 12 inches to structure are not required to have lateral force bracing. Source: Portland Building Department

• Vertical struts must be positively attached to the suspension systems and the structure above. Source: CISCA 3-4

• The vertical strut may be EMT conduit, metal studs or a proprietary compression post (see figure 3).

Wall Moldings (figures 4a and 4b)

• Wall moldings (perimeter closure angles) are required to have a horizontal flange 2 inches wide. One end of the ceiling grid shall be attached to the wall mold-ing, the other end shall have a ¾ inch clearance from the wall and free to slide. Source: ASCE 7-05 section 9.6.2.6.2.2 item b

• Where substantiating documentation has been provided to the local jurisdiction, perimeter clips may be used to satisfy the requirements for the 2-inch closure angle. Source: State of Oregon, Building Codes Division

• The grid shall be attached at two adjacent walls (pop rivets or approved method). Soffits extending to a point at least level with the bottom plane of the grid and independently supported and laterally braced to the structure above are deemed to be equivalent to walls. Source: State of Oregon, Building Codes Divsion

• There shall be a minimum ¾ inch clearance from the end of the grid system at un-attached walls. Source: ASCE 7-05 section 9.6.2.6.2.2 item b

Spreader Bars (figure 4b)

• Spreader (spacer) bars shall be used to prevent the ends of the main beams and cross tees at perimeter walls from spreading open during a seismic event. Perimeter wires shall not be in lieu of spreader bars. Source: CISCA Seismic zones 3-4

• Spreader bars are not required at perimeters where runners are attached directly to closure angles.

• Wire tying is an acceptable alternative to spreader bars.

• Spreader bars are not required if a 90 degree intersecting cross or main is within 8 inches of the perimeter wall.

• Where substantiating documentation has been provided to the local jurisdiction, perimeter clips may be used to satisfy the requirements for spreader bars. Source: State of Oregon, Building Codes Division

EMT CONDUIT

½" EMT conduit up to 5' 10"

¾" EMT conduit up to 7' 8"

1" EMT conduit up to 9' 9"

METAL STUDS

Single 15⁄8" metal stud (20 gauge) up to 12' 0"

Back-to-back 15⁄8" metal stud (20 gauge)

up to 15' 0"

Single 2 ½" metal stud (20 gauge) up to 13' 6"

Back-to-back 2 ½" metal stud (25 gauge)

up to 15' 0"

figure 3Maximum Recommended Lengths for Vertical Struts

45º or less

45º or less 45º or less

45º or less

12 gagesplayedbracewires

Main beamCross tee

figure 2Lateral force Bracing

maximum 8" (202 mm)WALL

minimum2" (50 mm)

figure 4aAttached Wall Molding Requirements

NORTHWEST WALL & CEILING BUREAU • SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN CEILINGS

Note: Plenum areas greater than 15' 0" will require engineering calculations.

Source: Portland Building Department

figure 4bUnattached Wall Molding Requirements

maximum 8" (202 mm)WALL

minimum2" (50 mm)

minimum3/4" (19 mm)

at unattached walls

Spreader bar orother suitable

system required tokeep perimiter

components fromspreading apart

NORTHWEST WALL & CEILING BUREAU • SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACOUSTICAL LAY-IN CEILINGS

3" (76 mm)

minimum45º angle

minimum45º angle

maximum 8"

plumb 1/6

45º

Splayed seismic bracing wire attachment

drill-in expansion anchor

Structural concrete

Steel strap 1" wide x 2" long x12 gage minimum

3 turns

Splayed seismic bracing wire

Vertical hanger wire attachment

Shot-in anchor

Structural concrete

Ceiling clip

3 turns

Vertical hanger wire

3/4"

5/8"max.

figure 5b • Countersloping

figure 5a

figure 6a

figure 6b

FlangePopRivet3/4"

minimum

figure 7

Hanger (Suspension) Wires (figures 5a and 5b)

• Hanger and perimeter wires must be plumb within 1 in 6 unless (figure 5a) counter sloping wires are provided (figure 5b). Source: ASTM C 636 section 2.1.4

• Hanger wires shall be 12 gage and spaced 4 feet on center or 10 gage spaced 5 feet on center. Source: ASTM C 636

• Any connection device at the supporting construction shall be capable of carrying not less than 100 pounds. Source: CISCA zones 3-4

• Powder driven shot-in-anchors are an approved method of attachment for hanger wires. Source: State of Oregon, Building Codes Division

• Terminal ends of each main beam and cross tee must be supported within 8 inches of each wall with a perimeter wire (see figure 4 & 5 b). Source: CISCA zones 3-4

• Wires shall not attach to or bend around interfering material or equipment. A trapeze or equivalent device shall be used where obstructions preclude direct suspension. Trapeze suspensions shall be a minimum of back-to-back 1¼ inch cold-rolled channels for spans exceeding 48 inches. Source: CISCA zones 3-4

Electrical fixtures• Light fixtures weighing less than 10 pounds shall have one 12 gage hanger wire

connected from the fixture to the structure above. This wire may be slack. Source:

CISCA Seismic zones 3-4

• Light fixtures weighing more than 10 pounds and less than 56 lbs. shall have two 12 gage wires attached at opposing corners of the light fixture to the structure above. These wires may be slack. Source: CISCA Seismic zones 3-4.

• Light Fixtures weighing more than 56 lbs. shall be supported by directly from the structure above. These wires must be taut. Source: CISCA Seismic zones 3-4

• Pendant mounted fixtures shall be directly supported from the structure above using a 9 gage wire or an approved alternate support without using the ceiling suspension system for direct support. Source: CISCA Seismic zones 3-4

• Tandem fixtures may utilize common wires.

Mechanical Services • Terminals or services weighing 20 lbs. but not more than 56 lbs. must have two

12 gage wires connecting them to the ceiling system hangers or the structure above. These wires may be slack. Source: CISCA Seismic zones 3-4

• Terminals or services weighing more than 56 lbs. must be independently sup-ported directly from the structure above. These wires must be taut. Source: CISCA

Seismic zones 3-4

Seismic Separation Joints (figure 7)

• For ceiling areas exceeding 2,500 square feet, a seismic separation joint or full height wall partition that breaks the ceiling shall be provided unless analyses are performed of the ceilings bracing system, closure angles and penetrations to provide sufficient clearance. Source: ASCE 7-05 item 9.6.2.6.2.2 d

• The layout and location of the seismic separation joint shall be per the designer of record and noted on the plans. If a seismic separation joint is required by the designer, the designer may use the generic joint detailed in this document or a proprietary joint. The amount of free movement (gap design) shall be a minimum of ¾ inch. Source: State of Oregon, Building Codes Division

• In lieu of seismic separation joints, the ceiling may be divided into areas less than 2500 square feet by the use of partitions or soffits as follows: partitions shall extend a minimum of 6 inches above the level of the plane of the grid and shall be inde-pendently braced to the structure above. Soffits shall extend to a point at least level with the bottom plane of the grid and shall be independently supported and laterally braced to the structure above. Source: State of Oregon Building Codes Division

• Other than partitions and soffits, seismic joints may not be used as part of a fire rated ceiling assembly unless substantiating documentation is provided. Source:

State of Oregon Building Codes Division

1032-A NE 65th St.

Seattle, WA 98115

Phone (206) 524-4243

Fax (206) 524-4136

Toll Free (800) 524-4215

[email protected]

www.nwcb.org

The NWCB has been serving the construction industry for over forty years. It is recognized as a technical authority, educational body and spokes-person for the wall and ceiling industry. It provides services to architects and the construction commu-nity on all matters relating to the diversified wall and ceiling industry.

As the industry’s development and coordination organization, the NWCB saw the need to establish a document to provide clarification and the intent of NEHRP (National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program) an agency of FEMA (Federal Emergency Management Agency). It is meant to serve as a set of recommendations and is not intended for any specific construction project. The NWCB makes no express or implied warranty or guarantee.

NWCB - OregonPhone: (503) 295-0333

Fax: (503) 295-2733

B.C. Wall and Ceiling AssociationPhone: (604) 597-7180

Fax: (604) 597-7208

Alberta Wall and Ceiling AssociationPhone: (403) 250-7045

Fax: (403) 291-9515

CROSS TEESThe cross member that interlock with the main beams, also known as cross runners or cross T-bars.

DIFFUSERA circular or rectangular metal grill used for the passage of air from a ducted system.

ESSENTIAL SERVICE BUILDINGSAny buildings designed to be used by public agencies as a fire station, police station, emergency operations center, State Patrol office, sheriff’s office, or emergency communication dispatch center.

GRIDThe main beams and cross tees of the suspension system.

HANGER WIRE10 or 12 gage soft annealed wire used as primary support for the grid system. Also called suspension wires.

LATERAL FORCE BRACINGThe bracing method used to prevent ceil-ing uplift or restrict lateral movement during a seismic event. Lateral force bracing consists of vertical struts and splay wires.

MAIN BEAMThe primary suspension member sup-ported by hanger wires, also known as the main runner, carrying tee, carrying runner or mains.

MOLDING/CLOSURE ANGLEA light gauge metal angle or channel fas-tened to the perimeter wall or partition to support the perimeter ends of an ac-coustical ceiling grid.

PERIMETER CLIPSProprietary angle bracket attached directly to the wall molding/closure angle which allows for ¾" movement in the event of seismic activity and interlocks properly with ends of grid system.

PERIMETER WIRES Hanger wires placed within eight inches of the surrounding walls.

PLENUMThe space above a suspended ceiling.

SLACK WIREA 12 gage wire that is not tight or taut.

SPREADER or SPACER BARA bar with notches to prevent the suspen-sion system from separating, also called a stabilizer bar.

SPLAY WIRESWires installed at an angle rather than perpendicular to the grid.

VERTICAL STRUTSThe rigid vertical member used in lateral force bracing of the suspension sys-tem. Also known as compression posts, seismic pods, seismic struts. Common materials are electrical conduit (EMT), metal studs or proprietary products.

GLOSSARY FOR THIS DOCUMENT (regional terminology may vary)

A L A S K A • I D A H O • O R E G O N • W A S H I N G T O N • A L B E R TA • B R I T I S H C O L U M B I A • S A S K AT C H E W A N

SprinklersFor ceilings without rigid bracing, sprinkler head penetrations shall have a 2 inch oversize ring, sleeve or adapter through the ceiling tile to allow free movement of at least 1 inch in all horizontal directions. Flexible head design that can accommodate 1 inch free movement shall be permitted as an alternate. Source: ASCE 7-05 9.6.2.6.2.2. item e

Ross Builders Northwest - PROJECT MANUAL · 2019-05-18 · Tualatin, Oregon 97062 T: (503) 843-8233...

Documents

Transcript of Ross Builders Northwest - PROJECT MANUAL · 2019-05-18 · Tualatin, Oregon 97062 T: (503) 843-8233...